14-D — Bellflower City Council, September 12, 2022

Page 1 of 2 ends

14-D

TO: Honorable Mayor and Members of the City Council

ATTENTION: Jeffrey L. Stewart, City Manager

FROM: Len Gorecki, Assistant City Manager/Director of Public Works Bernardo Iniguez, Public Works Manager

SUBJECT: Consideration and possible action to adopt Resolution No. 22-53 – A Resolution approving the Plans and Specifications for the Bellflower Gateway Sign (Specifications No. 22/23-06), pursuant to Government Code §830.6; establishing a project payment account and authorizing solicitation of bids.

DATE: September 12, 2022

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

This action would approve the Plans and Specifications, preserve the City’s right to assert design immunity to any claim for damages arising from the design, and authorize the Public Works Department to advertise for bids for the Bellflower Gateway Sign (the “Project”). The award of a contract will be brought before the City Council at a later date for approval.

RECOMMENDATION TO CITY COUNCIL

1) Adopt Resolution No. 22-53; and

2) Authorize the City Manager, or designee to execute the necessary documents for the General Fund to loan funds to the Public Arts Fund: or

3) Alternatively, discuss and take other action related to this item.

FISCAL IMPACT

The Engineer’s estimate of cost plus contingency to perform the work under Specifications No. 22/23-06 is $494,000. $306,000 is available in the Public Arts Fund.

The General Fund will loan the rest of the project cost to the Public Arts Fund. The loan will be repaid over the course of next several years as Public Arts funds are collected; Funds will be budgeted in Project Account No. 020-47312-9000 at the time of the bid award.
-1-

Staff Report – Bellflower Gateway Sign
Specifications No. 22/23-06
September 12, 2022

Page 2 of 2 ends

DISCUSSION

On August 8, 2019, the City entered into an agreement with Graphic Solutions for the preparation of a conceptual sign design for the City property at the southwest corner of Alondra Boulevard and Bellflower Boulevard. On May 11, 2020 and October 25, 2021, the City entered into Amendment Nos. 1 and 2, respectively, with Graphic Solutions for the preparation of the plans and specifications for the Project. The Project plans and specifications have now been completed.

Upon City Council approval of the plans and specifications, staff will solicit bids for the construction of the improvements.

ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW

Pursuant to the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) (Public Resources Code §§ 21000, et seq.) and CEQA Guidelines (California Code of Regulations, Title 14, §§ 15000, et seq.), the City conducted an environmental assessment. Based on the environmental assessment, the project was determined to be categorically exempt pursuant to CEQA Guidelines § 15303 (Class 3 – New Construction or Conversion of Small Structures).

ATTACHMENTS

Resolution No. 22-53....................................................................................................... 3 Plans and Specifications ................................................................................................. 5

-2-

Page 1 of 2 ends

CITY OF BELLFLOWER

RESOLUTION NO. 22-53

A RESOLUTION APPROVING THE PLANS AND

SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE BELLFLOWER GATEWAY
SIGN (SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06), PURSUANT TO
GOVERNMENT CODE § 830.6, ESTABLISHING A

PROJECT PAYMENT ACCOUNT AND AUTHORIZING

SOLICITATION OF BIDS

THE CITY COUNCIL RESOLVES AS FOLLOWS:

SECTION 1. The City Council finds and declares as follows:

A. Public Works Department staff prepared the Plans and Specifications for the Bellflower Gateway Sign (“Project”);

B. The Director of Public Works reviewed the completed Plans and Specifications for the Project and agrees that Plans and Specifications are complete and the Project may be completed;

C. The City Council wishes to obtain the immunities set forth in Government Code §830.6 with regard to the Plans, Specifications and completion of the Project; and

D. The City reviewed the project’s environmental impacts under the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) (Public Resources Code §§ 21000, et seq.) and CEQA Guidelines (California Code of Regulations, Title 14, §§ 15000, et seq.), the City conducted an environmental assessment.

Based on the environmental assessment, the project was determined to be categorically exempt pursuant to CEQA Guidelines § 15303 (Class 3 – New Construction or Conversion of Small Structures).

SECTION 2. Design Immunity; Authorization.

A. The Plans and Specifications for the Project are determined to be consistent with the City’s standards and are approved.

B. The Plans and Specifications approval set forth in this Resolution occurred before actual work on the Project construction commenced.

C. The approval granted by this Resolution conforms to the City’s General Plan.

D. The Public Works Director, or designee, is authorized to act on the City’s behalf in approving any alterations or modifications of the Plans and Specifications approved by this Resolution.

-3-

City of Bellflower
Resolution No. 22-53

Page 2 of 2 ends

E. The approval and authorization granted by this Resolution is intended to avail the City of the immunities set forth in Government Code § 830.6.

F. The City Manager, or designee, may solicit bids for the Project in accordance with applicable law.

SECTION 3. Project Payment Account. For purposes of the Contract Documents administering the Project, the City Council directs the City Manager, or designee, to establish a fund containing sufficient monies from the current fiscal year budget to pay for the Project (“Project Payment Account”). The Project Payment Account is the sole source of funds available for the Contract Sum, as defined in the Contract Documents administering the Project.

SECTION 4. If any part of this Resolution or its application is deemed invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, the City Council intends that such invalidity will not affect the effectiveness of the remaining provisions or applications and, to this end, the provisions of this Resolution are severable.

SECTION 5. Electronic Signatures. This Resolution may be executed with electronic signatures in accordance with Government Code §16.5. Such electronic signatures will be treated in all respects as having the same effect as an original signature.

SECTION 6. The Mayor, or presiding officer, is hereby authorized to affix his signature to this Resolution signifying its adoption by the City Council of the City of Bellflower and the City Clerk, or his duly appointed deputy, shall attest thereto.

SECTION 7. This Resolution will become effective immediately upon adoption.

PASSED, APPROVED, AND ADOPTED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF BELLFLOWER THIS 12TH DAY OF SEPTEMBER 2022.

________________________________
Ray Dunton, Mayor
ATTEST:

________________________________
Mayra Ochiqui, City Clerk

APPROVED AS TO FORM:

________________________________
Karl H. Berger, City Attorney -4-

CITY OF BELLFLOWER

BELLFLOWER, CALIFORNIA

PLANS

SPECIFICATIONS

AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

FOR THE

BELLFLOWER GATEWAY SIGN

SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06

PREPARED BY:

CITY OF BELLFLOWER

PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
16600 CIVIC CENTER DRIVE
BELLFLOWER, CALIFORNIA 90706
(562) 804-1424

For questions regarding these Bid Specifications
or project, please contact:

Project Manager: Bernardo Iniguez
(562) 804-1424, ext. 2233

BIDS DUE: THURSDAY, OCTOBER 13, 2022 at 11:00 AM

These plans and specifications are the exclusive property of the City of Bellflower and shall not be used in any manner without prior consent of the City of Bellflower. Any reuse of these plans and specifications by others shall be at other’s sole risk and without liability to the City of Bellflower.

-5-

CITY OF BELLFLOWER

BELLFLOWER GATEWAY SIGN

SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

NOTICE INVITING SEALED BIDS ............................................................................. N-1

BIDDING INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................................... I-1

BID DOCUMENTS (All Bid Documents must be submitted by bid date) Bid ................................................................................................................................ B-1 Bidders General Information ........................................................................................ B-2 Bidder’s Statement of Past Contract Disqualifications ................................................. B-3 Insurance Requirements .............................................................................................. B-4 List of Subcontractors ................................................................................................... B-6 Project Bid Sheet ......................................................................................................... B-7 Bid Bond ..................................................................................................................... B-11 Non Collusion Declaration .......................................................................................... B-12

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Agreement ................................................................................................................... C-1 Faithful Performance Bond ...................................................................................... FPB-1 Labor and Materials Bond .................................................................................... L&MB-1 Worker’s Compensation Insurance Certificate ......................................................... WC-1 Declaration of Sufficiency of Funds……………………………………………………..DSF-1

GUARANTY ................................................................................................................ G-1

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ SS-1 PCC § 9204 .................................................................................................... ATTACHED

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS ....................................................................................... TP-1

-6-

N-1

NOTICE INVITING SEALED BIDS

FOR THE BELLFLOWER GATEWAY SIGN

IN THE CITY OF BELLFLOWER
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06

The City of Bellflower is accepting sealed bids in the City Clerk’s office, 16600 Civic Center Drive, Bellflower, CA 90706, until 11:00 a.m. on:

THURSDAY, OCTOBER 13, 2022

at which time they will be publicly opened. Each bid must be accompanied by a certified or cashier’s check or bidder’s bond payable to the order of the City of Bellflower or cash for an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the bid price submitted, and the check, bond, or cash deposit of the successful bidder shall be forfeited to the City if such bidder fails to enter into the contract to perform the work within ten (10) days after written notice of award. Bids will not be accepted after that time.

As described in the Bidding Documents, the bids are for a public works project (“Project”) which consists of construction of the BELLFLOWER GATEWAY SIGN and related work as shown on the plans on file with the City’s Public Works Department. The Engineer’s Estimate of cost is $494,000. Bids will be publicly opened on Thursday, October 13, 2022. At the time of contract award, the contractor shall possess a Class “A” Contractor’s License or a combination of Class C-8, C-10, C-12, C-27, and C-45 Contractor’s License. No bid will be accepted from a contractor who has not been licensed in accordance with the Provisions of Chapter 9, Division III, of the Business and Professions Code of the State of California at the time the bid is submitted.

Following the issuance of the Notice to Proceed, the contractor shall have sixty (60) working days to complete the work.

Work on the Project must be performed in strict conformity with Specifications No. 22/23-06 as adopted by the City’s City Council on August 26, 2022 which is filed with the City’s Public Works Department. Copies of these plans and specifications may be obtained by prospective bidders from the Public Works Department, 16600 Civic Center Drive, Bellflower, CA 90706 for a non-refundable fee of $35.00. Plans and specifications can be mailed for an additional non-refundable fee of $10.00 per set.

Mandatory jobsite walk will be held at Thursday, September 29, 2022 at 10:30 AM at the southwest corner of Alondra Boulevard and Bellflower Boulevard, Bellflower, CA 90706. Prospective bidders will have opportunity to examine the project site and are encouraged to raise any questions associated with the project and site. Attendance of the jobsite walk is mandatory for parties wishing to submit a bid as the Prime Contractor.

The terms and conditions for bidding on the Project are described in the Bidding Instructions which can be found at www.bellflower.org . -7-

Notice Inviting Sealed Bids
Specifications No. 22/23-06
N-2

This project requires payment of State prevailing rates of wages for Los Angeles County. The contractor must post copies of the prevailing schedule at each job site.

Copies of these rates of wages are available from the State of California Department of Industrial Relations Prevailing Wage Unit, Telephone No. (415) 703-4774. The website for this agency is currently located at www.dir.ca.gov .

Note that the Project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the California Department of Industrial Relations. Pursuant to California law, the City must find bids failing to comply with all applicable Labor Code requirements including, without limitation, Labor Code §§ 1725.5 and 1771.4, to be nonresponsive.

Five percent (5%) will be deducted from each progress payment and retained by the City. The remainder less the amount of all previous payments will be paid to the Contractor. Pursuant to Public Contracts Code (“PCC”) § 22300, the Contractor may substitute securities for retention monies held by the City or request that the City place such monies into an escrow account. The Contractor is notified, pursuant to PCC § 22300, any such election will be at the Contractor own expense and will include costs incurred by the City to accommodate the Contractor’s request.

DATED this 26th day of August, 2022.

CITY OF BELLFLOWER, CALIFORNIA

-8-

Instructions to Bidders
Specifications No. 22/23-06
I-1

CITY OF BELLFLOWER

BELLFLOWER GATEWAY SIGN

SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06

BIDDING INSTRUCTIONS

1 DEFINITIONS. Unless provided otherwise, the definitions in the Greenbook, Special Conditions, or other Contract Documents are applicable to all Bidding Documents.

1.1 “Addenda” means written or graphic instruments issued by the City before the Bid Deadline that modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections.

1.2 “Alternate” means a proposed change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents which, if accepted, may result in a change to either the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, or both.

1.3 “Bid Deadline” means the date and time designated in the Notice for Bids as the last date and time for receipt of Bids, as may be revised by Addenda.

1.4 “Bidder” means a person or firm that submits a Bid.

1.5 “Bidding Documents” means the construction documents prepared and issued for bidding purposes including all Addenda.

1.6 “Lump Sum Base Bid” means the sum stated in the Bid for which Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents, but not including unit price items or Alternates.

1.7 “Unit Price” means an amount stated in the Bid for which Bidder offers to perform the Unit Price Work for a fixed price per unit of measurement. 2 BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS. By making its Bid, Bidder represents that:

2.1 Bidder read, understood, and made the Bid pursuant to the requirements in the Bidding Documents.

2.2 Bidder visited the Project site and is familiar with the conditions under which the Work will be performed and the local conditions as related to the Contract Documents.

2.3 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment, and systems required by the Bidding Documents.

2.4 Bidder and all Subcontractors, regardless of tier, have the appropriate current licenses issued by the State of California Contractor’s State License Board for -9-

Instructions to Bidders
Specifications No. 22/23-06
I-2
the Work to be performed. If Bidder is a joint venture, the Bidder will have a joint venture license appropriate for the performance of the work, and each member of the joint venture will likewise have the appropriate license. Business and Professions Code §§ 7000-7191 establish licensing requirements for contractors.

If a Bidder, that is a specialty contractor, submits a Bid involving 3 or more specialized building trades, the work of which is more than incidental and supplemental to the performance of the Work for which Bidder holds a specialty contractor license, Bidder must also hold either (1) a specialty contractor “C” license in each such trade, (2) a General Engineering contractor “A” license, or (3) a General Building contractor “B” license. This requirement is applicable whether or not Bidder lists a Subcontractor for each such trade.

2.5 If licensure or proper licensure is controverted, then proof of licensure pursuant to this section must be made by production of a verified certificate of licensure from the Contractors' State License Board which establishes that the individual or entity bringing the action was duly licensed in the proper classification of contractors at all times during the performance of any act or contract covered by the action. Nothing in this subdivision requires any person or entity controverting licensure or proper licensure to produce a verified certificate.

When licensure or proper licensure is controverted, the burden of proof to establish licensure or proper licensure is on the licensee.

2.6 Bidder has the expertise and financial capacity to perform and complete all obligations under the Bidding Documents.

2.7 The person executing the Bid Form is duly authorized and empowered to execute the Bid Form on Bidder’s behalf.

2.8 Bidder is aware of and, if awarded the Contract, will comply with Applicable Code Requirements in its performance of the Work.

2.9 The Bidder has paid the City’s business license fee(s). 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS.

3.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the City’s Public Works Department for the sum stated in the Notice for Bids.

3.2 Bidders will use a complete set of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids.

3.3 The City makes copies of the Bidding Documents available, on the above terms, for the sole purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and does not confer a license or grant permission for any other use of the Bidding Documents. 4 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS.

4.1 Before submitting its Bid, Bidder will carefully study and compare the various documents comprising the Bidding Documents and compare them with any other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction which relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted; will examine the Project site, the conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and the local conditions; and will at -10-

Instructions to Bidders
Specifications No. 22/23-06
I-3
once report to the City’s Representative errors, inconsistencies, or ambiguities discovered.

4.2 Requests for clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents will be addressed to the City’s Representative and must be received at least seven (7) days prior to the date of receipt of bids. No request shall be taken within the six (6) days prior to bid opening.

4.3 Clarifications, interpretations, corrections, and changes to the Bidding Documents will be made by Addenda. Clarifications, interpretations, corrections, and changes to the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding and Bidders will not rely upon them.
5 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS. No substitutions will be considered before award of Contract. Substitutions will only be considered after award of the Contract and as provided for in the Contract Documents.
6 SUBCONTRACTORS.

6.1 Each Bidder will list in the Bid Form all first-tier Subcontractors that will perform work, labor or render such services. The Bid Form contains spaces for the following information when listing Subcontractors: (1) Work Activity; (2) name of Subcontractor; (3) city of Subcontractor’s business location. Failure to list any of these items on the Bid Form will result in the City treating the Bid as if no Subcontractor was listed for the Work and that Bidder represents to the City that it is fully qualified to perform that portion of the Work and will perform do so.

6.2 Subcontractors listed in the Bid Form will only be substituted after the Bid Deadline with the City’s written consent in accordance with California law. 7 ADDENDA.

7.1 Addenda will be in writing and issued only by the City. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the City to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents and who have provided a street address for receipt of Addenda.

7.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection at the City’s Public Works Department.

7.3 The City will issue Addenda so that they are received by prospective Bidders not later than three (3) business days before the Bid Deadline. Addenda that withdraw the request for Bids or postpone the Bid Deadline may be issued any time before the Bid Deadline.

7.4 Each Bidder is responsible for ensuring that it has received all issued Addenda before issuing a Bid.
8 PRE-BID CONFERENCE. Bidder will attend a Pre-Bid Conference where the City will discuss the Bidding Documents, answer questions, accept comments, and conduct a Project site visit. The City requires all Pre-Bid Conference attendees to -11-

Instructions to Bidders
Specifications No. 22/23-06
I-4
arrive for the meeting on time and to sign an attendance list which is used to determine if Bidders meet this requirement. Any Bidder not attending the Pre-Bid Conference in its entirety will be deemed to have not complied with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and its Bid will be rejected. 9 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS

9.1 Bids will be submitted on the Bid Form included with the Bidding Documents.

Bids not submitted on the City’s Bid Form will be rejected.

9.2 All blanks on the Bid Form will be filled in legibly in ink or by typewriter.

9.3 Bidder’s failure to submit a price for any Alternate or unit price will result in the Bid being considered as nonresponsive. If Alternates are called for and no change in the Lump Sum Base Bid is required, enter “No Change.”

9.4 Each Bidder must fill out the “Bidders Statement of Past Contract Disqualifications” form stating any and all instances of contract disqualifications due to a violation of a law or safety regulation. The Bidder must explain the circumstances of each disqualification. The City may reject the bid based on such information.

9.5 Bidder will make no stipulations on the Bid Form nor qualify the Bid in any manner.

9.6 The Bids will be based upon full completion of all the Work as shown on the plans and specifications. It is expressly understood that the plans are drawn with as much accuracy as is possible in advance, but should errors, omissions or discrepancies exist in the plans which show conditions that vary from those encountered in construction, the Bidder (if awarded the Contract) specifically agrees to construct a completed work ready for the use and in the manner which is intended. In the event of increasing or decreasing of work, the total amount of work actually done or materials or equipment furnished must be paid for according to the unit or lump sum price established for such work under the contract, wherever such unit or lump sum price has been established. In the event no prices are named in the contract to cover such changes or alterations, the cost of such changes must be covered as extra work.

9.7 The Bid Form will be signed by a person or persons legally authorized to bind Bidder to a contract. Bidder’s Representative will sign and date the Declaration included in the Bid Form. Failure to sign and date the declaration will cause the Bid to be rejected.
10 BID SECURITY

10.1 Each Bid will be accompanied by Bid Security, in the amount of 10% of the Lump Sum Base Bid as security for Bidder’s obligation to enter into a Contract with the City on the terms stated in the Bid Form and to furnish all items required by the Bidding Documents. Bid Security will be a Bid Bond on the form provided by the City or a certified check made payable to “City of Bellflower.” When a -12-

Instructions to Bidders
Specifications No. 22/23-06
I-5
Bond is used for Bid Security, failure to use the City’s Bid Bond form will result in the rejection of the Bid.

10.2 If the apparent lowest responsible Bidder fails to sign the Agreement and furnish all items required by the Bidding Documents within the time limits specified in these Instructions to Bidders, the City will disqualify such Bidder and select the next apparent lowest responsible Bidder until all bids have been exhausted or the City may reject all bids. In such an event, the disqualified Bidder will be liable for and forfeit to the City the amount of the difference, not to exceed the amount of the Bid Security, between the amount of the disqualified Bid and the larger amount for which the City procures the Work.

10.3 If a Bid Bond is submitted and an attorney-in-fact executes the Bid Bond on behalf of the surety, a notarized and current copy of the power of attorney will be affixed to the Bid Bond. The surety issuing the Bid Bond will be listed in the latest published State of California, Department of Insurance list of, “Insurers Admitted to Transact Surety Insurance in This State.”

10.4 The City will retain Bid Security until the occurrence of one of the following:

10.4.1 All items required by the Bidding Documents have been furnished and the Agreement has been signed by the successful Bidder and the City.

10.4.2 The specified time has elapsed during which Bids may be withdrawn.

10.4.3 All Bids have been rejected.

10.5 The Bid Form, Bid Security, and all other documents required to be submitted with the Bid will be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope will be addressed to the City Clerk. The envelope will be identified with the BELLFLOWER GATEWAY SIGN, Bidder’s name and address, and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope will be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope labeled as follows: “SEALED BID ENCLOSED.”

10.6 Bids will be deposited at the designated location on or before the Bid Deadline. A Bid received after the Bid Deadline will be returned to Bidder unopened.

10.7 Bidder will assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids.

10.8 Oral, telephonic, facsimile, or telegraphic Bids are invalid and will not be accepted.
11 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID.

11.1 Before the Bid Deadline, a submitted Bid may be modified or withdrawn.

Notice of such action will be given to the City in writing and signed by the -13-

Instructions to Bidders
Specifications No. 22/23-06
I-6
Bidder’s authorized representative. A change so made will be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid.

11.2 A withdrawn Bid may be resubmitted up to the Bid Deadline, provided that it then fully complies with the Bidding Requirements.

11.3 Bid Security will be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as modified or resubmitted.

11.4 Bids may not be modified, withdrawn, or canceled within sixty (60) days after the Bid Deadline unless otherwise provided in Supplementary Instructions to Bidders.
12 OPENING OF BIDS. Bids submitted in the manner required by these instructions and are received on or before the Bid Deadline will be opened publicly. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS.

13.1 The City will have the right to reject all Bids.

13.2 The City will have the right to reject any Bid not accompanied by the required Bid Security or any other item required by the Bidding Documents, or a Bid which is in any other way materially incomplete or irregular. 14 AWARD

14.1 The City may retain all bids for a period of sixty (60) days for examination and comparison, and to delete any portion of the work from the contract.

14.2 The City will have the right to waive nonmaterial irregularities in a Bid and to accept the lowest responsive Bid as determined by The City.

14.3 The City will have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents.

14.4 The City will determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Lump Sum Base Bid plus all unit prices multiplied by their respective estimated quantities as stated in the Bid Form, if any, plus the Contractor Delay Damages multiplied by the “multiplier” as stated in the Bid Form, plus the amounts of all accepted Alternates.

14.4.1 Inclusion of Contractor Delay Damages within the Bid Form is solely for the purpose of determining the low bidder and establishing the City’s maximum daily liability as a result of City delays to Contractor, if any, and City has no obligation to pay any daily Contractor Delay Damages except as provided for in these Contract Documents for Compensable Delays. In the event that City becomes liable to Contractor for compensable delays, City agrees to pay Contractor the daily Contractor Delay Damages set forth in the Proposal Form or Contractor’s actual daily delay damages, whichever is less, for each day of Compensable Delay as provided for by these Contract Documents. -14-

Instructions to Bidders
Specifications No. 22/23-06
I-7

14.5 The City will select the apparent lowest responsive and responsible Bidder and notify such Bidder within thirty (30) days (unless number of days is modified in Supplementary Instructions to Bidders) after the Bid Deadline or reject all bids.

Within ten (10) days after receiving the City’s notice that Bidder was selected as the apparent lowest responsible Bidder, Bidder will submit to the City all of the following items:

14.5.1 Two originals of the Agreement signed by Bidder.

14.5.2 Two originals of the Labor and Materials Bond.

14.5.3 Two originals of the Faithful Performance Bond.

14.5.4 Certificates of Insurance.

14.5.5 Names of all Subcontractors, with their addresses, telephone number, facsimile number, trade on Bidders’ company stationery.

Evidence, as required by the City, of the reliability and responsibility of the proposed Subcontractors such as statements of experience, statements of financial condition, and references.

14.5.6 Preliminary Contract Schedule.

14.5.7 Selection of Retention Options and Escrow Agreement for Deposit of Securities in Lieu of Retention and Deposit of Retention. If not submitted, the City will withhold retention.

14.5.8 Cost Breakdown.

14.6 Before award of the Contract, the City will notify Bidder in writing, if the City objects to a Subcontractor proposed by Bidder, in which case Bidder will propose a substitute acceptable to the City. Failure of the City to object to a proposed Subcontractor before award will not preclude the City from requiring replacement of any Subcontractor based upon information received subsequent to award, information which cannot be properly evaluated before award due to time constraints, or information relating to a failure to comply with the requirements of the Contract.

14.7 If Bidder submits the two original signed Agreements and all other items within ten (10) days after receiving the City’s notification, and all such items comply with the requirements of the Bidding Documents, the City will award the Contract to Bidder by signing the Agreement and returning a signed copy of the Agreement to Bidder.

14.8 If the City consents to the withdrawal of the Bid of the apparent lowest responsible Bidder, or the apparent lowest responsible Bidder fails or refuses to sign the Agreement or submit to the City all of the items required by the Bidding Documents, within ten (10) days after receiving the City’s notification, or the City determines that the Bidder is not financially or otherwise qualified to perform the Contract, the City may reject such Bidder’s Bid and select the next apparent lowest responsible Bidder, until all bids are exhausted, or reject all Bids. -15-

Instructions to Bidders
Specifications No. 22/23-06
I-8
15 PROTEST

15.1 Procedure to be followed by protester and City Clerk.

A. Persons may challenge (the “Protester”) an award of a City of Bellflower Public Works contract (the “Project”) based upon whether the apparent lowest responsible bidder (the “Low Bidder”) is a “responsible bidder” as defined by applicable law.

B. The Protester must file a written statement with the City Clerk (the “Protest”) that sets forth the reasons for objection. The Protest must be filed with the City Clerk not later than seven (7) days after the bids were received and opened, or as soon as the Protester becomes aware of the ground for the Protest, whichever date occurs first. Any documents which support the objections must be filed together with the Protest.

C. Upon receiving the Protest, the City Clerk must mail a copy of the Protest to the Low Bidder, together with any supporting documents filed with the Protest. The City Clerk must include a letter of transmittal with the Protest which contains substantially the following information:

1. Notice that the Protest (and supporting documents, if any) was filed with the City Clerk;

2. Notice regarding the date, time, and place when and where the City Council will consider the bids received in connection with the Project; and

3. Notice that the Low Bidder may appear at the meeting and rebut the Protest including, without limitation, the ability to present evidence that the Low Bidder is qualified to perform the work and is the “lowest responsible bidder” on the Project.

D. In addition to the notice provided to the Low Bidder, the City Clerk must attempt to contact the Low Bidder by phone regarding the Protest. If the City Clerk is able to contact the Low Bidder, the City Clerk must provide, if the Low Bidder requests it, a facsimile copy of the Protest.

E. The City Clerk must also provide the Protester with notice regarding the date, time, and place when and where the City Council will meet to consider bids for the Project.

15.2 Procedure to be followed at the Hearing.

A. At the time set for consideration of the bids received in connection with the Project, the City Council must allow City staff to proceed with its presentation first.

B. Following the staff presentation, the City Council will allow the Protester to make his/her presentation. The Protester has the right to introduce -16-

Instructions to Bidders
Specifications No. 22/23-06
I-9
any testimony or other evidence which could not, by the exercise of reasonable diligence, have been submitted at the time the Protest was filed.

C. Following the Protester’s presentation, the Low Bidder has the right to cross-examine any witnesses who testified on behalf of the Protester and to rebut any other evidence introduced or produced by the Protester or City staff.

D. The City Council may, in its discretion, permit rebuttals and surrebuttals by the Protester and/or the Low Bidder.

E. At the conclusion of the hearing on the Protest, the City Council must decide whether, based on the evidence produced at the hearing, the Low Bidder is or is not the lowest responsible bidder.

F. In deciding where the Low Bidder is “responsible,” the City Council must consider the Low Bidder’s trustworthiness, and the quality, fitness and capacity of the Low Bidder to satisfactorily perform the work required to be performed for the Project. Evidence of pervasive and significant violations of the prevailing wage laws of the State of California by the Low Bidder on a City Public Works project or on public works projects involving other public agencies warrants a finding by the City Council that the Low Bidder is not the lowest responsible bidder.

G. If the Low Bidder is found to be “responsible” under the criteria referred to above, the City Council must award the contract for the Project to the Low Bidder, unless the City Council rejects all bids for the Project.

H. If the Low Bidder is found not be “responsible” under the criteria referred to above, the City Council must make a finding to that effect and must then award the contract to the second lowest responsible bidder, unless the City Council rejects all bids for the Project.

-17-

BID
Specifications No. 22/23-06
B-1
BID

BID TO: CITY OF BELLFLOWER, CALIFORNIA

The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with the City in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform the Work as specified or indicated in said Contract Documents entitled:

FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE

BELLFLOWER GATEWAY SIGN

IN THE CITY OF BELLFLOWER
SPECIFICATION NO. 22/23-06

Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including without limitation those in the Notice Inviting Bids and the Instructions to Bidders dealing with the disposition of the Bid Security.

This Bid will remain open for the period stated in the Notice Inviting Bids, unless otherwise required by law. Bidder will enter into an Agreement within the time and in the manner required in the Instructions to Bidders, and will furnish the insurance certificates, Payment Bond, Performance Bond, and all Permits required by the Contract Documents.

Bidder has examined copies of all the Contract Documents, including the following Addenda (receipt of which is hereby acknowledged):

Number ______________ Date ____________________

Bidder has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, the Work, the site, the locality where the Work is to be performed, the legal requirements (federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations), and the conditions affecting cost, progress, or performance of the Work, and has made such independent investigations as Bidder deems necessary.

In conformance with the current statutory requirements of Labor Code § 1860, et seq., the undersigned confirms the following as its certification:

I am aware of Labor Code § 3700, which require every employer to be insured against liability for worker's compensation, or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions, before commencing the performance of the Work of this Contract.

To all the foregoing, and including all Bid Schedule(s), List of Subcontractors, Non-collusion Affidavit, Bidder's General Information, and Bid Bond contained in these Bid Forms, said Bidder further agrees to complete the Work required under the Contract Documents within the Contract Time stipulated in said Contract Documents, and to accept in full payment therefor the Contract Price based on the Lump Sum or Unit Bid Price(s) named in the aforementioned Bidding Schedule(s).

Dated: ______________________________ Bidder:

By:
(Signature)

Title:
-18-

BID
Specifications No. 22/23-06
B-2

BIDDER'S GENERAL INFORMATION

The Bidder shall furnish the following information. Failure to complete all Items will cause the Bid to be non-responsive and may cause its rejection. Additional sheets may be attached as required.

1. BIDDER/CONTRACTOR'S Name and Street Address:

2. CONTRACTOR'S Telephone Number: ( )
Facsimile Number: ( )
Email address:

3. CONTRACTOR'S License: Primary Classification
State License Number(s)
Supplemental License Classifications
Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) Registration No. _______________________________

4. Surety Company and Agent who will provide the required Bonds on this Contract:

Name of Surety
Address

Surety Company Agent
Telephone Numbers: Agent ( ) Surety ( )

5. Type of Firm (Individual, Partnership or Corporation):

6. Corporation organized under the laws of the State of:

7. List the names and addresses of the principal members of the firm or names and titles of the principal officers of the corporation or firm:

-19-

BID
Specifications No. 22/23-06
B-3
BIDDER'S GENERAL INFORMATION (Continued)

8. Number of years experience as a contractor in this specific type of construction work:

9. List at least three related projects of comparable size and complexity completed to date:

1. Owner
Contact
Phone ( )
Project ( )
Address
Class of Work
Contract amount
Date completed

2. Owner
Contact
Phone ( )
Project ( )
Address
Class of Work
Contract amount
Date completed

3. Owner
Contact
Phone ( )
Project ( )
Address
Class of Work
Contract amount
Date completed

10. List the name and title of the person who will supervise full-time the proposed work for your firm:

11. Is full-time supervisor an employee contract services ?

12. A financial statement or other information and references sufficiently comprehensive to permit an appraisal of your current financial condition may be required by the Engineer.

13. Name of the person who inspected the site of the proposed Work for the bidder:

Name: Date of Inspection:

-20-

BID
Specifications No. 22/23-06
B-4

BELLFLOWER GATEWAY SIGN

BIDDER’S STATEMENT OF PAST CONTRACT DISQUALIFICATIONS

Please state all instances of being disqualified, removed, or otherwise prevented from bidding on, or completing, a federal, state, or local government project due to a violation of a law or safety regulation.

1. Have you ever been disqualified from any government contract?

Yes  No 

2. If yes, explain the circumstances:

_________________________________
Bidder’s Signature

-21-

BID
Specifications No. 22/23-06
B-5

INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
[MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH PROJECT PROPOSAL]

To be awarded this contract, the successful bidder must procure and maintain the following types of insurance with coverage limits complying, at a minimum, with the limits set forth below:

Type of Insurance Limits

Commercial general liability: $3,000,000
Business automobile liability $1,000,000
Workers compensation Statutory requirement.

Commercial general liability insurance must meet or exceed the requirements of ISO- CGL Form No. CG 00 01 11 85 or 88. The amount of insurance set forth above must be a combined single limit per occurrence for bodily injury, personal injury, and property damage for the policy coverage. Liability policies must be endorsed to name the City, its officials, and employees as “additional insureds” under said insurance coverage and to state that such insurance will be deemed “primary” such that any other insurance that may be carried by the City will be excess thereto. Such endorsement must be reflected on ISO Form No. CG 20 10 11 85 or 88, or equivalent. Such insurance must be on an “occurrence,” not a “claims made,” basis and will not be cancelable or subject to reduction except upon thirty (30) days prior written notice to the City.

Automobile coverage must be written on ISO Business Auto Coverage Form CA 00 01 06 92, including symbol 1 (Any Auto).

The Consultant must furnish to the City duly authenticated Certificates of Insurance evidencing maintenance of the insurance required under this Agreement, endorsements as required herein, and such other evidence of insurance or copies of policies as may be reasonably required by the City from time to time. Insurance must be placed with admitted insurers with a current A.M. Best Company Rating equivalent to at least a Rating of “A:VII.” Certificate(s) must reflect that the insurer will provide thirty (30) day notice of any cancellation of coverage. The Consultant will require its insurer to modify such certificates to delete any exculpatory wording stating that failure of the insurer to mail written notice of cancellation imposes no obligation, and to delete the word “endeavor” with regard to any notice provisions.

By signing this form, the bidder certifies that it has read, understands, and will comply with these insurance requirements if it is selected as the City’s consultant. Failure to provide this insurance will render the bidder’s proposal “nonresponsive.”

___________________ __________________________
Date Bidder
-22-

BID
Specifications No. 22/23-06
B-6
Contractor's Name
_________________________________________________________ List of Subcontractors and Off-Job Fabricators
Listing must comply with the provisions of Public Contract Code § 4104.

Name of Subcontractor
or Off-Job Fabricator
Contractor’s License No.

DIR Registration No.

Business Address
Telephone No.

Email address
Items of Work and Dollar
Amount

If more space is needed, attach additional sheets.

Public Contract Code § 4104 provides that bidders must list:
(a)(1) The name, the location of the place of business, and the California contractor license number of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the prime contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvement, or a subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to the prime contractor, specially fabricates and installs a portion of the work or improvement according to detailed drawings contained in the plans and specifications, in an amount in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime contractor's total bid or, in the case of bids or offers for the construction of streets or highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime contractor's total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000), whichever is greater.

Per Public Contract Code §4104, Contractor’s bidding on public projects are required to list above California contractor license numbers for all subcontractor’s performing work in excess of one- half of one-percent of the contract’s value.

-23-

BID
Specifications No. 22/23-06
B-7

UNIT PRICE BID SCHEDULE A
Schedule of Prices for the Construction of the:

BELLFLOWER GATEWAY SIGN
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
in Bellflower, California

Item
No. Description Estimated
Quantity
Unit
Price Total Amount

1. Mobilization (may not exceed 5%
of total construction cost) 1 LS

2. Decomposed Granite Paving 1,226 SF

3. 6” Concrete Mowcurb 199 LF

4. Concrete Pad 36 SF

5. Bench 2 EA

6. Clear and Grub Turf and
Landscape Area 1,324 SF

7. Fine Grading/Soil Preparation 1,324 SF

8. Irrigation Controller Assembly 1 EA

9. 1” Backflow Assembly, Master
Valve, and Flow Sensor 1 LS

10. Connection to 1 5/8 x ¾” Water
Meter 1 LS

11. Irrigation System, Complete 1 LS

12. 5 Gallon Planting 214 EA

13. 1 Gallon Planting 112 EA

14. Mulch (3” Layer) 12 CY

15. 90-day Maintenance 1 LS

16. Electrical Meter/Pedestal;
Electrical Service Connections and
Pull Boxes; Conduit and Wiring
1 LS

17. Furnish and Install Bellflower
Gateway Sign, Complete 1 LS

18. Install Owner-Furnished Bronze
Sculpture 1 LS

19. Minimum Construction Stormwater
Best Management Practices
(BMPs)/Erosion Control
1 LS

-24-

BID
Specifications No. 22/23-06
B-8

TOTAL BID PRICE – FOR SCHEDULE A
For the lump sum of

$
(Price in figures)

(Price in words)

QUANTITIES OF WORK:

The quantities of work or material stated in the unit price items of the Bid Schedule are supplied only to give an indication of the general scope of the Work. The City of Bellflower does not expressly or by implication agree that the actual amounts of work or material will correspond therewith, and reserves the right after award to increase or decrease the quantity of any unit price bid item, by an amount up to 25 percent of increase or decrease, without a change in the unit prices, and may delete any bid item in its entirety, and receive full credit in the amount shown in the Bid Schedule for the deleted item of Work.

Name of Bidder or Firm

-25-

BID
Specifications No. 22/23-06
B-9

BID BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we ___________________________

__________________________________________________________________, Principal,

and________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________, Surety, are held and firmly bound unto
THE CITY OF BELLFLOWER Obligee,
in the sum of Ten Percent of the total amount of the Bid for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our legal representatives, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

Principal submitted or is about to submit a bid or proposal to Obligee on a contract for

BELLFLOWER GATEWAY SIGN

Should a contract be awarded to the principal and principal, within such time as specified, duly execute the contract in the prescribed form and deliver the same to obligee with all required bonds/performance securities, certificates of insurance and such other items as required in the bidding or contract documents then this obligation is null and void. Otherwise, it will remain in full force and effect, and if the contract is awarded to principal and principal fails, within the time specified, to duly execute the contract in the prescribed form and deliver the same to obligee with all said required items, then surety must pay obligee the full penalty sum of this bond.

Surety, for value received, hereby agrees that no extension of time, change, alteration, modification, or addition to the bidding or contract documents, or of the work required thereunder, releases or exonerates surety on this bond or in any way affect the obligation of this bond; and surety does hereby waive notice of same.

Signed, sealed and dated
_______________________________________________
(Principal)

by________________________________________(Seal)

_______________________________________________
(Surety)

by_____________________________________________
Attorney-in-Fact

INDICATE COMPLETE ADDRESS OF SURETY TO WHICH

CORRESPONDENCE CONCERNING THIS BOND SHOULD BE
DIRECTED.

Telephone No.

-26-

BID
Specifications No. 22/23-06
B-10

NON COLLUSION DECLARATION TO BE EXECUTED
BY

BIDDER AND SUBMITTED WITH BID

The undersigned declares:

I am the __________________ of ________________________________, the party making the foregoing bid.

The bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation. The bid is genuine and not collusive or sham. The bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid. The bidder has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or to refrain from bidding. The bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder. All statements contained in the bid are true. The bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof, to effectuate a collusive or sham bid, and has not paid, and will not pay, any person or entity for such purpose.

Any person executing this declaration on behalf of a bidder that is a corporation, partnership, joint venture, limited liability company, limited liability partnership, or any other entity, hereby represents that he or she has full power to execute, and does execute, this declaration on behalf of the bidder.

I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct and that this declaration is executed on ____________ [date], at ______________________ [city], ________________________ [state].

___________________________
Signature

-27-

Agreement
Specifications No. 22/23-06
C-1

PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT

BETWEEN

THE CITY OF BELLFLOWER AND

This CONTRACT is entered into this day of , 20 , by and between the CITY OF BELLFLOWER, a general law city and municipal corporation (“the City”) and (“the Contractor”).

1. WORK.

A. The Contractor will provide all work required by the Contract Documents (the “Work”). The Contractor agrees to do additional work arising from changes ordered by the City in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The Contractor and the City agree to abide by the terms and conditions contained in the Contract Documents;

C. The Contractor will furnish all of the labor; supplies and materials; equipment; printing; vehicles; transportation; office space and facilities; all tests, testing and analyses; and all matters whatsoever (except as otherwise expressly specified to be furnished by the City) needed to perform and complete the Work and provide the services required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents.

D. “Contract Documents” means the Notice Inviting Bids; Instructions to Bidders; Supplementary Instructions to Bidders; Proposal; this Contract; Standard Specifications; Supplementary Conditions; Exhibits; Technical Specifications; List of Drawings; Drawings; Addenda; Notice to Proceed; Change Orders; Notice of Completion; and all other documents identified in the Contract Documents which together form the contract between the City and the Contractor for the Work. The Contract Documents constitute the complete agreement between the City and the Contractor and supersede any previous agreements or understandings.

2. CONTRACT SUM. The City agrees to pay the Contractor a sum not to exceed dollars ($ ) for the Work in the manner set forth in the Contract Documents. The City may adjust this amount as set forth in the Contract Documents.

3. TIME FOR PERFORMANCE.

A. The Contractor will fully complete the Work within ____ (XX) working days (the “Contract Time.”)

B. The Contract Time will commence when the City issues a notice to proceed.

The Contract Documents will supersede any conflicting provisions included on the notice to proceed issued pursuant to this Contract. -28-

Agreement
Specifications No. 22/23-06
C-2

C. The Contractor may not perform any Work until:

i. The Contractor furnishes proof of insurance as required by the Contract Documents; and

ii. The City gives the Contractor a written, signed, and numbered purchase order and notice to proceed.

D. By signing this Contract, the Contractor represents to the City that the Contract Time is reasonable for completion of the Work and that the Contractor will complete the Work within the Contract Time.

E. Should the Contractor begin the Work before receiving written authorization to proceed, any such Work is at the Contractor’s own cost and risk.

4. DISPUTES. Disputes arising from this contract will be determined in accordance with the Contract Documents and Public Contracts Code §§ 10240-10240.13.

5. THIRD PARTY CLAIMS. In accordance with Public Contracts Code § 9201, the City will promptly inform the Contractor regarding third-party claims against the Contractor, but in no event later than ten (10) business days after the City receives such claims. Such notification will be in writing and forwarded in accordance with the “Notice” section of the Contract Documents. As more specifically detailed in the Contract Documents, the Contractor agrees to indemnify and defend the City against any third-party claim.

6. TAXPAYER IDENTIFICATION NUMBER. The Contractor will provide the City with a Taxpayer Identification Number.

7. PERMITS AND LICENSES. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor, at its sole expense, will obtain and maintain during the Contract Time, all necessary permits, licenses, and certificates that may be required in connection with the Work.

8. OWNERSHIP OF DOCUMENTS. All documents, data, studies, drawings, maps, models, photographs and reports prepared by the Contractor under the Contract Documents are the City’s property. The Contractor may retain copies of said documents and materials as desired, but will deliver all original materials to the City upon the City’s written notice.

9. INDEMNIFICATION. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, defend, and hold the City harmless as set forth in the Contract Documents. The requirements as to the types and limits of insurance coverage to be maintained by the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents, and any approval of such insurance by the City, are not intended to and will not in any manner limit or qualify the liabilities and obligations otherwise assumed by the Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, to the provisions concerning indemnification.

10. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. The City and the Contractor agree that the Contractor will act as an independent contractor and will have control of all work and -29-

Agreement
Specifications No. 22/23-06
C-3
the manner in which is it performed. The Contractor will be free to contract for similar service to be performed for other employers while under contract with the City. The Contractor is not an agent or employee of the City and is not entitled to participate in any pension plan, insurance, bonus or similar benefits the City provides for its employees. Any provision in this Contract that may appear to give the City the right to direct the Contractor as to the details of doing the work or to exercise a measure of control over the work means that the Contractor will follow the direction of the City as to end results of the work only.

11. AUDIT OF RECORDS. The Contractor will maintain full and accurate records with respect to all services and matters covered under this Contract. The City will have free access at all reasonable times to such records, and the right to examine and audit the same and to make transcript therefrom, and to inspect all program data, documents, proceedings and activities. The Contractor will retain such financial and program service records for at least three (3) years after termination or final payment under the Contract Documents.

12. NOTICES. All communications to either party by the other party will be deemed made when received by such party at its respective name and address as follows:

The City The Contractor
Len Gorecki, Director of Public Works
16600 Civic Center Drive
Bellflower, CA
[email protected]

Any such written communications by mail will be conclusively deemed to have been received by the addressee three (3) days after deposit thereof in the United States Mail, postage prepaid and properly addressed as noted above. In all other instances, notices will be deemed given at the time of actual delivery. Changes may be made in the names or addresses of persons to whom notices are to be given by giving notice in the manner prescribed in this paragraph.

13. NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY. This Contract and every provision herein is for the exclusive benefit of the Contractor and the City and not for the benefit of any other party. There will be no incidental or other beneficiaries of any of the Contractor’s or the City’s obligations under this Contract.

14. INTERPRETATION. This Contract was drafted in, and will be construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, and exclusive venue for any action involving this Contract will be in Los Angeles County.

15. EFFECT OF CONFLICT. In the event of any conflict, inconsistency, or incongruity between any provision of the Contract Documents, precedence will be as follows:

A. This Contract;

B. The Standard Specifications; and
-30-

Agreement
Specifications No. 22/23-06
C-4
C. Precedence of documents as determined in the Standard Specifications.

16. SEVERABILITY. If any portion of the Contract Documents are declared by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid or unenforceable, then such portion will be deemed modified to the extent necessary in the opinion of the court to render such portion enforceable and, as so modified, such portion and the balance of this Contract will continue in full force and effect.

17. AUTHORITY/MODIFICATION. The Parties represent and warrant that all necessary action has been taken by the Parties to authorize the undersigned to execute this Contract and to engage in the actions described herein. This Contract may be modified by written amendment. The City’s city manager, or designee, may execute any such amendment on the City’s behalf.

18. ACCEPTANCE OF FACSIMILE SIGNATURES. The Parties agree that this Contract, agreements ancillary to this Contract, and related documents to be entered into in connection with this Contract will be considered signed when the signature of a party is delivered by facsimile transmission. Such facsimile signature will be treated in all respects as having the same effect as an original signature.

19. COVENANTS AND CONDITIONS. The parties agree that all of the provisions hereof will be construed as both covenants and conditions, the same as if the words importing such covenants and conditions had been used in each separate paragraph.

20. CAPTIONS. The captions of the paragraphs of this Contract are for convenience of reference only and will not affect the interpretation of this Contract.

21. TIME IS OF ESSENCE. Time is of the essence for each and every provision of the Contract Documents.

[SIGNATURES ON NEXT PAGE]

-31-

Agreement
Specifications No. 22/23-06
C-5

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have executed this contract the day and year first hereinabove written.

CITY OF BELLFLOWER _______

_________________________________ ____________________________ Jeffrey L. Stewart,
City Manager

_____________________________

ATTEST:

_____________________________ Taxpayer ID No. _______________ Mayra Ochiqui,
City Clerk

APPROVED AS TO FORM:

_________________________________
Karl H. Berger,
City Attorney

-32-

Faithful Performance Bond
Specifications No. 22/23-06
FPB-1

CITY OF BELLFLOWER

BELLFLOWER GATEWAY SIGN

SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06

FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND

Bond No.

Bond Fee:

(“PRINCIPAL”)
and , a corporation incorporated under the laws of the State of and licensed by the State of California to execute bonds and undertakings as sole surety, as surety (“SURETY”), are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF BELLFLOWER (“CITY”) in the sum of ($ ) dollars, lawful money of the United States, which may be increased or decreased by a rider hereto executed in the same manner as this bond, for the payment of which sum PRINCIPAL and SURETY bind themselves, their successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, by this instrument.

PRINCIPAL or SURETY will apply this bond for the faithful performance of any and all of the conditions and stipulations set forth in this bond, SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06, and the public works contract executed with such Specifications. In the case of any default in the performance of the conditions and stipulations of this undertaking, it is agreed that PRINCIPAL or SURETY will apply the bond or any portion thereof, to the satisfaction of any damages, reclamation, assessments, penalties, or deficiencies arising by reason of such default.

BOND CONDITIONS

1. PRINCIPAL will construct the public improvements identified in SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06, a copy of which is on file with CITY’s Public Works Department (“Public Project”). Such performance will be in accordance with CITY’s plans and profiles which are made a part of this bond when said plans and profiles are approved by the City Council and filed with CITY’s Public Works Department. CITY has estimated the required amount of the bond as shown above.

2. PRINCIPAL’s work on the Public Project will be done in accordance with CITY’s plans and specifications and with any permit issued by CITY. Should PRINCIPAL fail to complete all required work within the time allowed, CITY may, at its sole discretion, cause all required work to be done and the parties executing the bond will be firmly bound for the payment of all necessary costs therefor.

3. PRINCIPAL will guarantee its work against any defective work, labor, or materials on the Public Project for a period of one (1) year following the Public Project’s completion and acceptance by CITY.

4. This bond is conditioned upon and guarantees due compliance with all applicable law including, without limitation, the Bellflower Municipal Code (“BMC”).

-33-

Faithful Performance Bond
Specifications No. 22/23-06
FPB-2

5. SURETY, for value received, agrees that no changes, extensions of time, alteration or modification of SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06 or of the obligation to be performed will in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it waives notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or modification of the contract documents or of the obligation to be performed.

6. This bond consists of this instrument; the plans and specifications identified above; and the following two (2) attached exhibits all of which are incorporated herein by reference:

A. A certified copy of the appointment, power of attorney, bylaws or other instrument entitling or authorizing the persons executing this bond to do so;

B. A certificate issued by the county clerk for the county in which SURETY’s representative is located conforming with California Code of Civil Procedure § 995.640 and stating that SURETY’s certificate of authority has not been surrendered, revoked, cancelled, annulled, or suspended, or in the event that it has, that renewed authority has been granted; and

7. Should PRINCIPAL perform its obligations within the time allowed, PRINCIPAL’s obligation will be void upon the acceptance of the performance by CITY; otherwise this obligation will remain in full force and effect.

SIGNED AND SEALED this day of , 20__.

PRINCIPAL’s PRESIDENT SURETY’s PRESIDENT

PRINCIPAL’s SECRETARY SURETY’s SECRETARY

PRINCIPAL’s MAILING ADDRESS: SURETY’s MAILING ADDRESS:

NOTE: ALL signatures must be acknowledged by a notary public. -34-

Labor and Materials Bond
Specifications No. 22/23-06
L&MB-1

CITY OF BELLFLOWER

BELLFLOWER GATEWAY SIGN

SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06

LABOR AND MATERIALS BOND

Bond No.

Bond Fee:

, as principal (“PRINCIPAL”)
and , a corporation incorporated under the laws of the State of and licensed by the State of California to execute bonds and undertakings as sole surety, as surety (“SURETY”), are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF BELLFLOWER (“CITY”) in the sum of ($ ) dollars, lawful money of the United States, which may be increased or decreased by a rider hereto executed in the same manner as this bond, for the payment of which sum PRINCIPAL and SURETY bind themselves, their successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, by this instrument.

This bond is conditioned upon and guarantees payment by PRINCIPAL to contractors, subcontractors, and persons renting equipment; payment by PRINCIPAL and all PRINCIPAL’S subcontractors for all materials, provisions, provender, or other supplies, and equipment used in, upon, for or about the performance of the work contemplated in SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06 (“Public Project”), the public works contract executed for such Public Project, and for all work or labor of any kind performed for the Public Project. In the case of any default in the performance of the conditions and stipulations of this undertaking, it is agreed that PRINCIPAL or SURETY will apply the bond or any portion thereof, to the satisfaction of any damages, reclamation, assessments, penalties, or deficiencies arising by reason of such default.

BOND CONDITIONS

1. PRINCIPAL will construct the public improvements identified in SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06, and the public works contract executed for such Specifications, copies of which is on file with CITY’s Public Works Department (“Public Project”). Such performance will be in accordance with CITY’s plans and profiles which are made a part of this bond when said plans and profiles are approved by the City Council and filed with CITY’s Public Works Department.

2. PRINCIPAL will pay all contractors, subcontractors, and persons renting equipment.

3. PRINCIPAL will pay for all materials and other supplies, for equipment used in, on, for or about the performance of the Public Project, and will pay for all work and labor thereon.

4. This bond is conditioned upon and guarantees due compliance with all applicable law including, without limitation, the Bellflower Municipal Code (“BMC”). -35-

Labor and Materials Bond
Specifications No. 22/23-06
L&MB-2

5. SURETY, for value received, agrees that no changes, extensions of time, alteration or modification of SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06, or of the obligation to be performed will in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it waives notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or modification of the contract documents or of the obligation to be performed.

6. This bond consists of this instrument; the plans and specifications identified above; and the following TWO (2) attached exhibits all of which are incorporated herein by reference:

A. A certified copy of the appointment, power of attorney, bylaws or other instrument entitling or authorizing the persons executing this bond to do so; and

SIGNED AND SEALED this day of , 20__.

PRINCIPAL’s PRESIDENT SURETY’s PRESIDENT

PRINCIPAL’s SECRETARY SURETY’s SECRETARY

PRINCIPAL’s MAILING ADDRESS: SURETY’s MAILING ADDRESS:

NOTE: ALL signatures must be acknowledged by a notary public.

-36-

Worker’s Compensation
Specifications No. 22/23-06
WC-1

WORKERS’ COMPENSATION CERTIFICATE

(AS REQUIRED BY LABOR CODE § 1861)

I am aware of Labor Code § 3700 which requires every employer to be insured against liability for workers’ compensation, or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of said Code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the Work of this Contract.

Contractor

Title

-37-

Declaration of Sufficiency of Funds
Specifications No. 22/23-06
DSF-1

DECLARATION OF SUFFICIENCY OF FUNDS
(California Labor Code Section 2810)

I, the undersigned, an authorized representative of ________________ (insert name of Bidder) (“Bidder”) with authority to make the statements contained in this Declaration on behalf of Bidder, hereby declare the following:

1. The Bidder’s employer identification number for state tax purposes is ______________________ (insert identification number).

2. The Bidder’s workers’ compensation insurance policy number is ______________________ (insert policy number) and the name, address, and telephone number of the insurance carrier providing said insurance is:
__________________________________ (insert information requested).

3. The following information is provided concerning any and all vehicles that are owned by the Bidder and that will be used for transportation in connection with any service provided for the performance of the Work that is subject of the Bidder’s Bid to the District (insert information requested.

Attach addition sheets, if needed):

Vehicle Vehicle ID No.

Vehicle
Liability Insurance Policy No.
(of Policy covering vehicle)
Name, Address and Telephone No.
of Vehicle Liability Insurance Carrier
(issuing Policy covering vehicle)

-38-

Declaration of Sufficiency of Funds
Specifications No. 22/23-06
DSF-2

4. The following is the address of any real property that will be used to house workers in connection with the performance of the W ork that is subject of the Bidder’s Bid to the District (insert information requested. If no such housing will be provided, enter “none”). ___________________________.

5. The actual or estimated number of workers that will be employed to perform the Work of the Project that is the subject of the Bidder’s Bid, the total amount of wages to be paid to said workers, and the date on which said wages will be paid are as follows (attach additional sheets, if needed):

Total Number of Workers Total Amount of Wages Dates for Payment of Wages

6. Check only one of the following boxes, as applicable:

The statement of number of workers declared in Paragraph 5, above, is a statement of the actual number of workers that will be employed; or

The actual number of workers requested in Paragraph 5, above, is unknown and therefore the statement of number of workers declared therein is based on the Bidder’s best estimate available at the time of Bid, rather than the actual number of workers that will be employed.

7. The actual or estimated total number of persons and entities who will be utilized as independent contractors to perform the Work of the Project that is the subject of the Bidder’s Bid (together with their known, current local, state, and federal contractor license identification numbers that each is required to have under local, state or federal laws or regulations are as follows (attach additional sheets, if needed):

List of Independent Contractors Current, Local, State and Federal Contractor License Identification Number

-39-

Declaration of Sufficiency of Funds
Specifications No. 22/23-06
DSF-3

8. Check only one of the following boxes, as applicable:

The statement of number of independent contractors declared in Paragraph 7, above, is a statement of the actual number of independent contractors that will be utilized; or,

The actual number of independent contractors requested in Paragraph 7, above, is unknown and therefore the statement of number of independent contractors declared therein is based on the Bidder’s best estimate available at the time of Bid, rather than the actual number of independent contractors that will be utilized.

I, the undersigned, declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing statements are within my personal knowledge and are true and correct. Executed on this ______ day of ______________, in the year 20___.

_____________________________________

_____________________________________
Print Name

-40-

Guaranty
Specifications No. 22/23-06
G-1

CITY OF BELLFLOWER

BELLFLOWER GATEWAY SIGN

SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06

GUARANTY

In accordance with the terms of the contract for the BELLFLOWER GATEWAY SIGN Project in the City of Bellflower (the “Contract”) approved ______________________________ between the City of Bellflower (the “Agency”) and the undersigned (the “Contractor”), under which the Contractor shall complete work as described in the Contract Documents (as defined in the Contract), the following guarantee of said work is hereby made.

If any of the items installed pursuant to the Contract, prove defective or if the item, as a whole, proves defective, due to faulty workmanship, material furnished or methods of installation, or if the said item or any part thereof fails to operate properly, as planned, due to any of the above causes, all within one (1) year after date on which the work is accepted by the Agency, then the undersigned agrees the repairs shall be made and such materials as are necessary shall be furnished and installed within thirty (30) days after the receipt of demand from the Agency; provided, that if the Contract Documents require a longer guaranty period, then the longer period shall apply. In the event repairs are not made within thirty (30) days, the Agency shall have the unqualified option to make any needed repairs or replacements itself or by any other contractor. The Contractor agrees to reimburse the Agency, upon demand, of its expenses incurred in restoring said items to the condition contemplated in the Contract, including the cost of any equipment or materials replaced, or upon demand by the Agency, to replace any such equipment and repair said items completely without cost to the Agency so that they will operate successfully as originally contemplated.

Emergency repairs must necessarily be made by the Agency; therefore, when defective material or workmanship results in emergency repairs, the undersigned agrees to reimburse the Agency, upon demand, expenses incurred.

Each item will be deemed defective within the meaning of this guaranty in the event that item fails to operate as originally intended thereof and in accordance with the plans and specifications included in the Contract. The Faithful Performance Bond required for the Contract shall remain in full force and effect for the entire first year of the applicable guarantee period.

_____________________________ ________________________________ Date (Print Name of Contractor, Company or Corporation)

________________________________
Signature

-41-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-1

CITY OF BELLFLOWER

PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Except as modified by these Standard Specifications, the provisions of the latest edition of the “Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction” (“Greenbook”) and its supplements prepared and promulgated by the Southern California Chapters of the American Public Works Association and the Associated General Contractors of America, constitute the Standard Specifications for this project. THESE STANDARD

SPECIFICATIONS ARE INTENDED TO, AND DO, TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER ANY CONFLICTING PROVISION OF THE GREENBOOK.

1. NUMBERING OF SECTIONS

The numbering of these Standard Specifications is NOT intended to conform with the Greenbook. Rather, the numbering is specific for these Standard Specifications. As noted at the outset, however, the provisions contained within these Standard Specifications supersede any conflicting clauses within the Greenbook and govern the contractual relationship between the Parties.

2. MODIFICATIONS

To the extent that the provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with the Green Book, the Contract Documents take precedence.

3. DEFINITIONS

Unless the contrary is stated or clearly appears from the context, the following definitions will govern the construction of the words and phrases used in these Standard Specifications.

Acceptance – The date on which the City Council accepts the Work as complete.

Architect, Design Engineers, Soils Engineer, Structural Engineers – Advisors employed by the City.

Bidder – Any individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or combination thereof, submitting a proposal for the work contemplated, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative.

Compensable Delay – a delay entitling the Contractor to an adjustment of the Contract Sum and an adjustment of the Contract Time in accordance with this Agreement.

Due Notice – A written notification, given in due time, of a proposed action where such notification is required by the contract to be given a specified interval of time (usually 48 hours or two working days) before the commencement of the contemplated action. -42-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-2

Notification may be from Public Works Director to Contractor or from Contractor to Public Works Director.

Public Works Director – The City Public Works Director, or designee, as defined in the Greenbook. Unless otherwise provided, all correspondence and decisions made relative to the contract will be by the City Public Works Director or designee.

PCC – California Public Contract Code.

Prompt – The briefest interval of time required for a considered reply, including time required for approval of a governing body.

(Check if applicable) State Standard Specifications - State of California Standard Specifications ( https://dot.ca.gov/programs/design/ccs-standard-plans-and-standard- specifications).

Working Days – A working day is defined as any day, except Saturdays, Sundays, legal holidays and days when work is suspended by the Public Works Director.

4. ABBREVIATIONS
AAN American Association of Nurserymen
AGC Associated General Contractors of America
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
APWA American Public Works Association
ASA American Standard Association
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
CA MUTCD California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices IEEE Institute of Electric and Electronic Engineers
NEC National Electric Code
Greenbook The most current edition of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, and subsequent supplements prepared by Public Works Standards, Inc.

SPPWC Standard Plans for Public Works Construction by the American Public Works Association
SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction by the American Public Works Association

5. ACCESS TO PROJECT SITE

Not later than the date designated in the City Notice to Proceed, the City will provide access to the real property and facilities upon which the Work is to be performed, including access to real property and facilities designated in the Contract Documents for the Contractor’s use.

6. SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING

Except as provided in PCC §§ 4100, et seq., each bidder will file with its bid the name and location of the place of business of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the prime contractor in or about the construction of the work -43-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-3

or improvement, or a subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to the prime contractor, specifically fabricates and installs a portion of the work or improvement according to detailed drawings contained in the plans and specifications, in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent of the prime contractor’s total bid. Only one subcontractor will be listed for each portion of the work, which portion will be defined in the bid. In each instance, the nature and extent of the work to be sublet will be described. The failure of the Contractor to specify a subcontractor, or the listing of more than one subcontractor for the same portion of the work, constitutes an agreement by the Contractor that it is fully qualified to perform that portion itself and that it will perform that portion itself.

The Contractor must have the City Council’s written consent to substitute a subcontractor other than that designated in the original bid, to permit any subcontract to be assigned or transferred, or to allow a subcontract to be performed by other than the original subcontractor.

Subcontracting of work for which no subcontractor was designated in the original bid, and which is more than one-half of one percent of the work, will be allowed only in cases of public emergency or necessity, and then only after a finding reduced to writing as a public record of the City Council setting forth the facts constituting the emergency or necessity.

Violation of any of the above provisions will be considered a breach of the Contract, and the City may terminate the Contractor’s control over the Work, cancel the contract, or assess the Contractor a penalty of not more than 10 percent of the subcontract involved.

All persons engaged in the work, including subcontractors and their employees will be considered as employees of the Contractor. The Contractor will be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, procedures, and the coordination of all portions of the Work. The City will deal directly with, and make all payments to, the prime Contractor.

When subcontracted work is not being prosecuted in a satisfactory manner, the Contractor will be notified to take corrective action. The Public Works Director may report the facts to the City Council. If the City Council so orders, and on receipt by the Contractor of written instructions from the Public Works Director, the subcontractor will be removed immediately from the Work. That subcontractor will not again be employed on the Work.

If licensure or proper licensure is controverted, then proof of licensure pursuant to this section must be made by production of a verified certificate of licensure from the Contractors’ State License Board which establishes that the individual or entity bringing the action was duly licensed in the proper classification of contractors at all times during the performance of any act or contract covered by the action. Nothing in this subdivision requires any person or entity controverting licensure or proper licensure to produce a verified certificate. When licensure or proper licensure is controverted, the burden of proof to establish licensure or proper licensure is on the licensee.

-44-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-4

The Contractor will submit experience statements for each subcontractor who will perform contract work that amounts to more than 10% of the Work.

7. CONTRACT BONDS

The Faithful Performance Bond and the Labor and Materials Bond must be paid and in effect for one year after the acceptance of the job by the City in accordance with the guarantee required by the Greenbook.

The term “surety bond,” “guarantee,” and “bond” also includes such other acceptable security, such as letters of credit or cash deposit agreements issued by responsible financial institutions, which are approved by the City Attorney. Sureties must be admitted to do business in California.

8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The Contractor will maintain the following at the Work site:

• One as-built copy of the Plans and Specifications, in good order and marked to record current changes and selections made during construction. As-built plans must be submitted to the City representative for approval before the City pays a final retention amount.

• The current accepted Contract Schedule.

• Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.

• Approved permits from other agencies, including Cal-OSHA permits for trench shoring.

• All other required submittals.

The Plans, Specifications, and other Contract Documents will govern the Work. The Contract Documents are intended to be complementary and cooperative and to describe and provide for a complete project. Anything in the Specifications and not on the Plans, or on the Plans and not in the Specifications, will be as though shown or mentioned in both.

Payment for any items on the plans for which there is no specific bid item will be included in the various items of work or in any item to which it is appurtenant.

If the Contractor performs any work which it knows or should know involves an error, inconsistency, or omission without notifying and obtaining written consent from the Public Works Director, the Contractor will be responsible for the resulting losses, including, without limitation, the costs of correcting defective work.

9. PRECEDENCE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

-45-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-5

As the figured dimensions shown on the plans and in the specifications of the Contract may not in every case agree with scaled dimensions, the figured dimensions will be followed in preference to the scaled dimensions and plans to a large scale will be followed in preference to the plans to a small scale. Should it appear that the work to be done, or any of the matters relative thereto, are not sufficiently detailed or explained in the Contract, the Contractor will apply to the Public Works Director for such further explanations as may be necessary and will conform thereto as part of the Contract so far as may be consistent with the terms thereof. Any items shown on drawings and not mentioned in the specifications will be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both.

10. ACCURACY OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

Although it is believed that much of the information pertaining to conditions and existing utilities that may affect the cost of the Work will be shown on the Plans or indicated in the Specifications, the City does not warrant the completeness or accuracy of such information.

The Contractor will carefully study and compare each of the Contract Documents with the others and with information furnished by the City and will promptly report in writing to the Public Works Director any errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Contract Documents or inconsistencies with applicable law observed by the Contractor.

The Contractor will take field measurements, verify field conditions, perform soil investigations, and carefully compare with the Contract Documents such field measurements, conditions, and other information known to the Contractor before commencing the Work. Errors, inconsistencies, or omissions discovered at any time will be promptly reported in writing to the Public Works Director.

11. RIGHT-OF-WAY

When the Contractor arranges for additional temporary work areas and facilities, the Contractor will provide the City with proof that the additional work areas or facilities were left in a condition satisfactory to the owner(s) of said work areas or facilities before acceptance of the work.

12. SURVEYING

The Contractor will provide for all construction surveying required to layout, monitor and complete the work. The surveying will be performed by a Land Surveyor or Civil Engineer authorized to practice land surveying by the State of California.

The Project Benchmark is shown on the plans. The Contractor will establish all necessary control lines based on the plans and record information on file with the County of Los Angeles Surveyor and the Public Works Director.

It is the Contractor’s responsibility to protect the survey control as shown on the plans.

If the survey control is destroyed or disturbed during construction, the Contractor will -46-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-6

provide for resetting them and file appropriate documents with the County of Los Angeles at the direction of the Public Works Director.

Computations, survey notes, and other data used to accomplish the work will be neat, legible and accurate. Copies of all computations, survey notes, and other data (electronic format may be required) will be furnished to the Public Works Director before beginning work that requires their use.

13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Construction Survey – Unless a separate bid item is provided, payment will be considered included in the other items of the bid and no additional payment will be made therefore.

14. BASIS FOR ESTABLISHING COSTS

Regardless of ownership, the rates to be used in determining the equipment usage costs will not exceed those listed for the same or similar equipment in the California State Department of Transportation publication of Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rates effective for the period of usage.

15. MARK UP

Work by Contractor. The following percentages will be added to the Contractor’s costs and will constitute the markup for all overhead and profits.

Labor .................................................... 20 Materials .................................................... 15 Equipment Rental .................................................... 15 Other Items and Expenditures .............................................. 15

To the sum of the costs and markups provided for in this subsection, 1 percent will be added as compensation for bonding. No other formula, e.g., the Eichleay or other method, may be used to calculate daily damages for office overhead, profit, or other purported loss.

Work by Subcontractors. When all or any part of the extra work is performed by a Subcontractor, the markup established in this Section will be applied to the Subcontractor’s actual cost of such work. A markup of 10 percent on the first $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work and a markup of 5 percent on work added in excess of $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work may be added by the Contractor.

In the event that City becomes liable to Contractor for compensable delays, City agrees to pay Contractor the daily Contractor Delay Damages set forth in the Bid Form or Contractor’s actual daily delay damages, whichever is less, for each day of Compensable Delay as provided for by these Contract Documents.

-47-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-7

16. DAILY REPORTS BY CONTRACTOR

If disagreement continues regarding extra work, the Contractor may seek compensation in accordance with the Claims procedure. Daily Reports required by this subsection must be made part of the Claim as supporting data for the Claim.

17. CHANGED CONDITIONS

If the Contractor encounters concealed or unknown conditions that differ materially from those anticipated or expected (“changed conditions”), the Contractor will immediately notify the Public Works Director or his designee in writing of such changed conditions (upon discovery and before disturbing such changed conditions), so that the Public Works Director or his designee can determine if such conditions require design details that differ from those design details shown in the Contract Documents. Notwithstanding any other time period, the Contractor is liable to City for any extra costs incurred as a result of the Contractor’s failure to promptly give such notice.

Changed conditions include, without limitation, the following:

• Subsurface or latent physical conditions differing materially from those represented in the Contract Documents;

• Unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character being performed; and

• Material differing from what is represented in the Contract which the Contractor believes may be hazardous waste as defined in California Health & Safety Code § 25117 that is required to be removed to a Class I, II, or III disposal site in accordance with applicable law.

The Public Works Director or his designee will promptly investigate conditions that appear to be changed conditions. The Public Works Director’s decision, and any dispute regarding that decision, will be made in accordance with the Greenbook except that the Public Works Director will render a decision promptly.

Any information provided pursuant to INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS is subject to the following provisions:

• The information is made available for the Bidders’ convenience and is not a part of the Contract.

• The City has not determined the accuracy or completeness of such information and all such information is made available to Bidders without any representation or warranty by the City whatsoever as to its accuracy, completeness, or relevancy.

-48-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-8

• Bidders will independently evaluate such information for their use and will be solely responsible for use or interpretation of such information. Any such use or interpretation will not be the basis of any claim against the City.

18. DISPUTED WORK

If the Contractor and the City do not reach agreement on disputed work, the City may direct the Contractor to proceed with the work. Any payment for the disputed work will be determined pursuant to the claims procedures in these Standard Specifications.

Although not to be construed as proceeding under extra work provisions, the Contractor will keep and furnish records of disputed work as required by the Contract Documents.

19. INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS

Unless otherwise specified, inspection at the source of production for such materials and fabricated items as bituminous paving mixtures, structural concrete, fabricated metal products, cast metal products, welding, reinforced and unreinforced concrete pipe, application of protective coatings, and similar shop and plant operations is not required. A certificate of compliance, signed by an authorized officer of the producer, certifying compliance with the contract documents will be submitted for all of the following materials: steel pipe, sizes less than 18 inches; vitrified clay pipe; asbestos cement pipe; cast iron pipe; reinforced concrete pipe; non-reinforced concrete pipe; and PVC sewer and water pipe; subject to sampling and testing by City.

Standard items of equipment, such as electric motors, conveyors, plumbing fittings and fixtures, lumber, plywood, and so on, are subject to inspection at the job site.

All other equipment items will be inspected and tested in accordance with the contract documents.

The City does not provide full time inspection. The Contractor will provide 24-hour minimum notice for each inspection required by the work unless other arrangements have been agreed upon, in writing, with the Public Works Director. Any inspection required outside of normal working hours and days, including holidays, will be at the Contractor’s cost at rates established by the City.

20. INSPECTION OF MATERIALS NOT PRODUCED LOCALLY

Contractor purchased materials, fabricated items, and equipment, produced at sources located more than 50 miles outside the corporate limits of the City, and which are specified to be inspected in the Contract Documents, will be inspected by inspectors or testing laboratories arranged for and paid for by City. Report of such inspection must be submitted to the City. If any item inspected fails to meet the specified criteria, the Contractor will pay all costs for reinspection, and such costs may be deducted from payments due to the Contractor.

21. TRADE NAMES OR EQUALS
-49-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-9

Whenever any material, product, equipment, or service is specified by brand, trade, or proprietary name, the item so specified will be deemed to be followed by the words “or equal.”

For the City’s consideration of a proposed “equal” item, the Bidder must submit, a minimum of 10 calendar days before the date of the bid opening, documentation of the particulars of the proposed “equal item.” At a minimum, the submitted documentation will include:

• Written request with explanation of why the product should be considered as an equal product.
• Material specifications.
• Technical specifications.
• Test data.
• Samples.
• Comparison chart of key specifications of the “equal” item against similar specifications of the specified item.
• Work locations and reference telephone numbers of at least three (3) locations where the proposed “equal” item has been recently installed under similar conditions.
• Warranty data.

The Bidder will be notified by the Public Works Director whether or not the proposed “equal” product is acceptable to the City five calendar days before the date of the bid opening. Failure to submit all required documentation and/or submittal of incomplete documents may result in the City’s rejection of the proposed “equal” product without further consideration.

22. PROTECTION

If the Contractor, while performing the Work, discovers utility facilities not identified correctly or not shown in the contract plans or specifications by the City, the Contractor will immediately notify the City and utility owner in writing.

23. RESPONSIBILITY OF UTILITY REMOVAL OR RELOCATION

The City is responsible to arrange for the removal, repair, or relocation of existing utilities located within the project limits if such utilities are not correctly identified in the contract plans or specifications by the City. The City has sole discretion to perform repairs or relocation work or permit the Contractor to do such repairs or relocation.

24. DELAYS

Actual loss is understood to include no items of expense other than idle time of equipment and necessary payments for idle time of workers, cost of extra moving of equipment, and cost of longer hauls. Compensation for idle time of equipment and idle time of workers will be determined by these Standard Specifications and no markup will -50-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-10

be added in either case for overhead and profit. The cost of extra moving of equipment and the cost of longer hauls will be paid for as extra work.

25. CALCULATING IDLE TIME

Equipment and worker idle time is calculated in accordance with these Standard Specifications and the Greenbook; it is based upon the actual normal working time during which the delay condition exists, but in no case will exceed 8 hours in any one day. The days for which compensation will be paid will be the calendar days, excluding Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays, during the existence of the delay.

26. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK

A. Pre-Construction Meeting:

After contract award, City will arrange for a pre-construction meeting to discuss the construction of the project. City will invite utility agencies and the contractor will arrange for all of its sub-contractors to attend the meeting.

B. Contract Schedule

After notification of award and before starting any work, the Contractor will submit a Contract Schedule to the Public Works Director for review, as required by these Standard Specifications within 15 calendar days of award.

C. Contract Schedule Content

The Contract Schedule, and any updated Contract Schedule, will meet the following requirements:

• Schedules must be suitable for monitoring progress of the Work. • Schedules must provide necessary data about the time for the Public Works Director’s decisions.
• Schedules must be sufficiently detailed to demonstrate adequate planning for the Work.
• Schedules must represent a practical plan to complete the Work within the Contract Time.
• Schedules must show the critical path method for completing the Work.

The Public Works Director’s review of the form and general content of the Contract Schedule and any updated Contract Schedules is only for the purpose of determining if the listed requirements are satisfied, nothing more.

D. Effect of Contract Schedule

The Contract Schedule, and any updated Contract Schedules, will represent a practical plan to complete the Work within the Contract Time. Extension of any schedule beyond the Contract Time will not be acceptable. Schedules showing the Work completed in -51-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-11

less than the Contract may be acceptable if judged by the Public Works Director or his designee to be practical. Acceptance of such a schedule by the Public Works Director will not change the Contract Time. The Contract Time, not the Contract Schedule, will control in determining liquidated damages payable by the Contractor and in determining any delay.

If a schedule showing the Work completed in less than the Contract Time is accepted, the Contractor will not be entitled to extensions of the Contract Time for Excusable Delays or Compensable Delays or to adjustments of the Contract Sum for Compensable Delays until such delays extend the completion of the Work beyond the expiration of the Contract Time.

The Contractor will plan, develop, supervise, control, and coordinate the performance of the Work so that its progress and the sequence and timing of Work activities conform to the current accepted Contract Schedule. The Contractor will continuously obtain from Subcontractors information and data about the planning for and progress of the Work and the delivery of equipment, will coordinate and integrate such information and data into updated Contract Schedules, and will monitor the progress of the Work and the delivery of equipment. The Contractor will act as the expeditor of potential and actual delays, interruptions, hindrances, or disruptions for its own forces and those forces of Subcontractors. The Contractor will cooperate with the Public Works Director in developing the Contract Schedule and updated Contract Schedules.

The Public Works Director’s review and comments about any schedule or scheduling data will not relieve the Contractor from its sole responsibility to plan for, perform, and complete the Work within the Contract Time. Review and comments about any schedule will not transfer responsibility for any schedule to the Public Works Director or City nor imply their agreement with (1) any assumption upon which such schedule is based or (2) any matter underlying or contained in such schedule.

The Public Works Director’s failure to discover errors or omissions in schedules that have been reviewed, or to inform the Contractor that the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others are behind schedule, or to direct or enforce procedures for complying with the Contract Schedule will not relieve the Contractor from its sole responsibility to perform and complete the Work within the Contract Time and will not be a cause for an adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

The Contractor will perform the Work in accordance with the currently accepted Contract Schedule.

E. Commencement of Contract Time

The Contract Time will commence when the City issues a Notice to Proceed. The Work will start on the date specified in the Notice to Proceed and within a maximum of 15 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed and be diligently prosecuted to completion with the time provided in the Specifications.

27. DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR
-52-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-12

A. General

Should the Contractor fail to begin delivery of material and equipment, to commence the Work within the time specified, to maintain the rate of delivery of material, to execute the Work in the manner and at such locations as specified, or fail to maintain the Work schedule (as determined by the current accepted Contract Schedule) which will ensure the City’s interest, or if the Contractor is not carrying out the intent of the Contract, the City may serve written notice upon the Contractor and the Surety on its Faithful Performance Bond demanding satisfactory compliance with the Contract.

B. Termination of Contractor’s Control Over the Work

City may terminate the Contractor’s control over the Work without liability for damages when, in the City’s opinion, the Contractor is not complying in good faith, has become insolvent, or has assigned or subcontracted any part of the Work without the City’s consent. Should such termination occur, the Contractor will be paid the actual amount due based on Contract Unit Prices or lump sums bid and the quantity and quality of the Work completed at the time of termination, less damages caused to the City by the Contractor’s action or inaction.

In the event of such termination of control, the City may do any one, or combination of, the following:

• Serve written notice upon the Surety on its Faithful Performance Bond demanding satisfactory compliance with the Contract. In such event the Surety will, within 5 days, assume control and perform the Work as successor to the Contractor;
• The City may perform the Work itself and deduct the cost thereof from any payment due to the Contractor;
• The City may replace the Contractor with a different contractor to complete the work and deduct the cost thereof from any payment due to the Contractor.

Nothing herein will waive, or serve as a limitation upon, any additional remedy the City may have under these Contract Documents or applicable law.

C. Surety’s Assumption of Control

Should the Surety assume any part of the Work, it will take the Contractor’s place in all respects for that part and will be paid by the City for all work performed by it in accordance with the Contract. If the Surety assumes the entire Contract, all money due the Contractor at the time of its default will be payable to the Surety as the Work progresses, subject to the terms of the Contract.

If the Surety does not assume control and perform the Work within five days after receiving notice of cancellation, or fails to continue to comply, the City may exclude the Surety from the premises. The City may then take possession of all material and equipment and complete the Work by City’s forces, by letting the unfinished work to -53-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-13

another contractor, or by a combination of such methods. In any event, the cost of completing the Work will be charged against the Contractor and its Surety and may be deducted from any money due or becoming due from the City. If the sums due under the Contract are insufficient for completion, the Contractor or Surety will pay to the City within five days of completion, all costs in excess of the sums due.

The provisions of this subsection will be in addition to all other rights and remedies available to the City under applicable law.

28. DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME

A. General

If delays are caused by unforeseen events beyond the control of the Contractor, such delays will entitle the Contractor to an extension of time as provided herein, but the Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment due to such delays except as otherwise provided herein. Excusable delay may include war, earthquakes exceeding 3.5 on the Richter Scale, government regulation, labor disputes outside the contemplation of the parties, strikes outside the contemplation of the parties, fires, floods, changes to the Work as identified herein, or other specific events that may be further described in the Specifications.

Delays to the project caused by labor disputes or strikes involving trades not directly related to the project, or involving trades not affecting the project as a whole will not warrant an extension of time.

The City will not grant an extension of time for a delay by the Contractor’s inability to obtain materials unless the Contractor furnishes to the Public Works Director documentary proof. The proof must be provided in a timely manner in accordance with the sequence of the Contractor’s operations and accepted construction schedule.

Should delays be caused by events other than those included herein, the Public Works Director may, but is not required to, deem an extension of time to be in the City’s best interests.

B. Extensions of Time

If granted, extensions of time will be based upon the effect of delays to the critical path of the Work as determined by the current accepted Contract Schedule. Delays to minor portions of the Work that do not affect the critical path will not be eligible for extensions of time.

C. Payment for Delays to Contractor

Any payment for compensable delay will be based upon actual costs excluding, without limitation, what damages, if any, the Contractor may have reasonably avoided.

The Contractor understands that this is the sole basis for recovering delay damages and explicitly waives any right to calculate daily damages for office overhead, profit, or -54-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-14

other purported loss, using different formulas including, without limitation, the Eichleay Formula.

D. Written Notice and Report

If the Contractor desires payment for a delay or an extension of time, it will give the Public Works Director written notice of such request not later than the time limit set forth in the Proposal for submitting a claim after the event or occurrence giving rise to a delay claim. Failure to submit a written request within such amount of time will result in the Contractor waiving its delay claim.

Any claim for payment or an extension of time must be in the form required by the “Claims” sections of these Standard Specifications.

In no event will the City grant the Contractor an extension of time if the delay is within the Contract Time as identified by the Contract Documents.

29. WORKDAYS AND WORKING HOURS

City Hall is ordinarily open from Monday thru Thursday during normal working hours (8 a.m. to 5:30 p.m.) and alternating Fridays (8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m.). It is closed on the following holidays:

New Year’s Day - January 1
Martin Luther King, Jr. Day - January 17
President’s Day - February 21
Memorial Day - May 30
Independence Day - July 4
Labor Day - September 5
Veterans’ Day - November 11
Thanksgiving - November 24
Friday after Thanksgiving - November 25
Christmas Eve - December 24
Christmas - December 25
New Year’s Eve - December 31

If the Contractor requests an inspection on a day when City Hall is closed, then the Contractor will have to reimburse the City for the costs of inspection. The Contractor must request such an inspection at least 48 hours in advance. City inspections during hours when City Hall is closed are subject to inspection overtime fees to be paid for by the Contractor. Friday work that does not require inspection can be done without an inspection fee and must be discussed with City staff before its occurrence. If the Contractor does construction on a Friday or a day when City Hall is closed, that day is counted as a project working day.

On workdays, Contractor’s activities will be confined to the hours between 7:30 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. Traffic may only be restricted between the hours of 7:30 am and 2:00 pm and subject to the review of the City Manager.
-55-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-15

A. Night Work

Except as otherwise provided in the Technical Specifications or separate permit, City does not permit Work between the hours of 4 p.m. and 7:30 a.m. of the following day.

B. Weekend and Holiday Work

The Public Works Director may, but is not required to, allow the Contractor to work on Saturdays, Sundays and City Holidays.

30. COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE

The Work will be inspected by the Public Works Director for acceptance upon the Public Works Director receiving the Contractor’s written assertion that the Work is complete.

If, in the Public Works Director’s judgment, the Work is complete and is ready for acceptance, the Public Works Director will accept the Work on behalf of the City in the manner prescribed by the City. Once a Notice of Completion is issued, the Contractor is relieved from responsibility to protect the Work.

All work will be guaranteed by the Contractor against defective workmanship and materials furnished by the Contractor for a minimum period of one year from the date the Work was completed. The Contractor will replace or repair any such defective work in a manner satisfactory to the Public Works Director, after notice to do so from the Public Works Director, and within the time specified in the notice. If the Contractor fails to make such replacement or repairs within the time specified in the notice, the City may perform this work and the Contractor’s sureties will be liable for the cost thereof.

31. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

If all the Work is not completed before or upon the expiration of the Contract Time, City will sustain damage. Since it is and will be impracticable to determine the actual damage which the City will sustain in the event of and by reason of such delay, it is agreed that the Contractor will pay to the City the sum specified in the Proposal for each and every calendar day beyond the time prescribed to complete the work not as a penalty, but as a predetermined liquidated damage. The Contractor agrees to pay such liquidated damages as are herein provided, and in case the same are not paid, agrees that the City may deduct the amount thereof from any money due or that may become due to the Contractor under the contract.

Unless otherwise specified, liquidated damages will be $1,000 per calendar day.

32. DISPUTES AND CLAIMS; PROCEDURE

A. General

-56-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-16

Consistent with PCC §§ 9204 and 10240.6, “Claim” means a written demand or assertion by the Contractor that seeks an adjustment or interpretation of the terms of the Contract Documents, payment of money, extension of time, or other relief with respect to the Contract Documents, including a determination of disputes or matters in question between the City and the Contractor arising out of or related to the Contract Documents or the performance of the Work, and claims alleging an unforeseen condition or an act, error, or omission by the City, the Public Works Director, their agents or employees. “Claim” does not mean, and the Claims procedures herein do not apply, to the following:

• Claims respecting penalties for forfeitures prescribed by statute or regulations, which a government agency is specifically authorized to administer, settle, or determine.
• Claims respecting personal injury, death, reimbursement, or other compensation arising out of or resulting from liability for personal injury or death. • Claims respecting a latent defect, breach of warranty, or guarantee to repair. • Claims respecting stop notices.

If a Claim is subject to the Change Order procedures, the Claim arises upon the issuance of a written final decision denying in whole or in part the Contractor’s Change Order Request. If a Claim is not subject to the Change Order Procedures, the Claim arises when the Contractor discovers, or reasonably should discover, the condition or event giving rise to the Claim. The requirements of this Section are intended to supplement and implement PCC § 9204, a copy of which is attached for reference.

Accordingly, pursuant to PCC § 9204(f), the parties agree to utilize these Standard Specifications.

B. Form

A Claim must include the following:

• A statement that it is a Claim and a request for a decision.

• A detailed description of the act, error, omission, unforeseen condition, event or other condition giving rise to the Claim.

• If the Claim is subject to the Change Order procedures, a statement demonstrating that a Change Order Request was timely submitted and denied.

• A detailed justification for any remedy or relief sought by the Claim, including to the extent applicable, the following:

 If the Claim involves extra work, a detailed cost breakdown claimed. The breakdown must be provided even if the costs claimed have not been incurred when the Claim is submitted.

 To the extent costs have been incurred when the Claim is submitted, the Claim must include actual cost records (including, without limitation, -57-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-17

payroll records, material and rental invoices) demonstrating that costs claimed have actually been incurred.

 To the extent costs have not yet been incurred at the time the Claim is submitted, actual cost records must be submitted on a current basis not less than once a week during any time period costs are incurred. A cost record will be considered current if submitted within seven calendar days of the date the cost reflected in the record is incurred. At the Public Works Director’s request, claimed extra costs may be subject to further verification procedures (such as having an inspector verify the performance of alleged extra work on a daily basis).

• If the Claim involves an error or omission in the Contract Documents:

 An affirmative representation that the error or omission was not discovered before submitting a bid for the Contract; and

 A detailed statement demonstrating that the error or omission reasonably should not have been discovered by the Contractor, its Subcontractors and suppliers, before submitting a bid for the Contract.

• If the Claim involves an extension of the Contract Time, written documentation demonstrating the Contractor’s entitlement to a time extension.

• If the Claim involves an adjustment of the Contract Sum for delay, written documentation demonstrating the Contractor’s entitlement to such an adjustment.

• A personal certification from the Contractor that reads as follows:

“I, , BEING THE (MUST BE AN

OFFICER) OF (CONTRACTOR
NAME),

DECLARE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY UNDER CALIFORNIA LAW, AND DO

PERSONALLY CERTIFY AND ATTEST THAT I HAVE THOROUGHLY REVIEWED

THE ATTACHED CLAIM FOR ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION OR EXTENSION OF TIME, AND KNOW ITS CONTENTS, AND SAID CLAIM IS MADE IN GOOD FAITH; THE SUPPORTING DATA IS TRUTHFUL AND ACCURATE; THAT THE AMOUNT

REQUESTED ACCURATELY REFLECTS THE CONTRACT ADJUSTMENT FOR WHICH THE CONTRACTOR BELIEVES CITY IS LIABLE; AND, FURTHER, THAT I AM FAMILIAR WITH CALIFORNIA PENAL CODE § 72 AND CALIFORNIA GOVERNMENT CODE § 12650, ET SEQ., PERTAINING TO FALSE CLAIMS, AND

FURTHER KNOW AND UNDERSTAND THAT SUBMITTING OR CERTIFYING A

FALSE CLAIM MAY LEAD TO FINES, IMPRISONMENT, AND OTHER SEVERE LEGAL CONSEQUENCES.”

C. Claims Submitted to Public Works Director

-58-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-18

Within 30 calendar days after the circumstances giving rise to a Claim occur, the Contractor will submit its Claim to the Public Works Director for a decision. Regardless of any Claim submittal, or any dispute regarding a Claim, unless otherwise directed by the Public Works Director, the Contractor will not cause any delay, cessation, or termination of the Work, but will diligently proceed with the performing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Except as otherwise provided, the City will continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.

D. Claim Is Prerequisite to Other Remedy

The Contractor certifies that it is familiar with PCC § 10240.2 and understands and agrees that submitting a Claim in accordance with these Specifications is an express condition precedent to the Contractor’s right to otherwise pursue a claim whether through alternative dispute resolution or by litigation. Should the Contractor fail to submit a claim in accordance with these Specifications, including the time limits set forth herein, it will waive any right to a remedy, whether in law or equity, it might otherwise have pursuant to the Contract Documents or applicable law.

E. Decision on Claims

The Public Works Director will promptly review Claims submitted by the Contractor in accordance with these Standard Specifications. Should the Public Works Director require additional supporting evidence to evaluate the claim, the Public Works Director will request such additional information in writing. Any such requested data will be furnished not later than 10 calendar days after the Contractor receives the Public Works Director’s request.

The Public Works Director will render a decision not later than 30 calendar days after either receiving the Claim or the deadline for furnishing additional supporting data, whichever is later. If the Claim amount is more than $50,000, the time period will be extended to 60 days. If the Public Works Director fails to render a decision within the time period established herein, then the Claim will be deemed denied. The Public Works Director’s decision will be final and binding unless appealed in accordance with these Specifications.

The Public Works Director’s decision on a Claim will include a statement substantially as follows:

“This is a decision pursuant to the Standard Specifications of your contract. If you are dissatisfied with the decision and have complied with the procedural requirements for asserting claims, you may have the right to alternative dispute resolution or litigation.

Should you fail to take appropriate action within 30 calendar days of the date of this decision, the decision will become final and binding and not subject to further appeal.”

F. Appeal of Public Works Director’s Decision

Should the Contractor dispute the Public Works Director’s decision, then the Contractor must appeal that decision to the City Manager within 30 calendar days of receiving the Public Works Director’s decision.
-59-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-19

The City Manager will address disputes or claims within 30 calendar days after receiving such request and all necessary supporting data. The City Manager’s decision on the dispute or claim will be the City’s final decision.

If the Contractor disputes the City Manager’s decision, then the Contractor must demand alternative dispute resolution in accordance with this Section and the PCC within 30 calendar days of the City’s final decision.

G. Mediation

If the City and the Contractor agree, disputes between the parties may be submitted to non-binding mediation. If the parties cannot agree to an alternative form of mediation, then mediation will be administered by the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”) under its Construction Industry Mediation Rules, unless the use of such rules are waived by mutual stipulation of both parties.

The parties may, but are not required to be, represented by counsel in mediation.

The requirement for mediation will not alter or modify the time limitations otherwise provided for claims and no conduct or settlement negotiation during mediation will be considered a waiver of the City’s right to assert that claim procedures were not followed.

H. Arbitration

If the City and Contractor do not agree to mediation, then disputes will be submitted to neutral non-binding (except as provided herein) arbitration. Arbitration will be conducted in accordance with PCC § 10240.3. Any decision rendered by an arbitrator will be consistent with PCC § 10240.8.

The exclusive venue for any arbitration will be in Los Angeles County.

The expenses and fees of the arbitrators and the administrative fees, if any, will be divided among the parties equally. Each party will pay its own counsel fees, witness fees, and other expenses incurred for its own benefit.

I. When Arbitration Decision Becomes Binding

The decision rendered by the arbitrator will become binding upon the parties unless appealed to the Los Angeles County Superior Court pursuant to PCC § 10240.12 within 30 calendar days of the decision. If subsequent litigation results in an award to the party appealing the arbitration that is less than or equal to that of the arbitration decision, or if the litigation results in a decision in favor of the nonappealing party, then the party appealing the arbitration will pay the nonappealing party’s attorney’s fees and court costs.

J. Appeal to Superior Court; Waiver of Jury Trial

-60-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-20

Should a party timely object to the arbitration decision, it may file a petition with the Los Angeles County Superior Court in accordance with California Code of Civil Procedure (“CCP”) §§ 1285, et seq. Notwithstanding the limitations set forth in CCP § 1286.2, the court may vacate, correct, or adjust an arbitration award, and enter judgment in accordance with CCP § 1287.4, for any legal or equitable basis including, without limitation, error of law. The court will apply the substantial evidence standard of review when considering the appeal of an objecting party.

BY EXECUTING THESE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, THE CONTRACTOR AGREES

TO HAVE DISPUTES OR CONTROVERSY CONCERNING THE CONSTRUCTION,

INTERPRETATION, PERFORMANCE, OR BREACH OF THESE CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING CLAIMS FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT OR ISSUES OF BAD FAITH DECIDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THIS SECTION. BOTH THE CITY

AND THE CONTRACTOR WAIVE THEIR RIGHT TO A JURY TRIAL FOR THESE DISPUTES OR ISSUES.

33. PREVAILING WAGES

The Contractor will post at appropriate conspicuous points at the site of the project a schedule showing determinations of the Director of Industrial Relations of the prevailing rate of per diem wages. It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain copies of the prevailing rate of per diem wages. One source that may be used is the California Department of Industrial Relations website which is currently located at www.dir.ca.gov , or by calling the Prevailing Wage Unit at (415) 703-4774.

Attention is directed to Labor Code §§ 1777.5, 1777.6 and 3098 concerning the employment of apprentices by the Contractor or any subcontractor.

Labor Code § 1777.5 requires the Contractor or subcontractor employing tradesmen in any apprenticeship occupation to apply to the joint apprenticeship committee nearest the site of the public works project and which administers the apprenticeship program in that trade for a certificate of approval. The certificate will also fix the ratio of apprentices to journeymen that will be used in the performance of the contract. The ratio of apprentices to journeymen in such cases will not be less than one to five except:

• When employment in the area of coverage by the joint apprenticeship committee has exceeded an average of 15 percent in the 90 calendar days before the request for certificate, or

• When the number of apprentices in training in the area exceeds a ratio of one to five, or

• When the trade can show that it is replacing at least 1/30 of its membership through apprenticeship training on an annual basis state-wide or locally, or

-61-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-21

• When the Contractor provides evidence that the Contractor employs registered apprentices on all of his contracts on an annual average of not less than one apprentice to eight journeymen.

The Contractor is required to make contributions to funds established for the administration of apprenticeship programs if the Contractor employs registered apprentices or journeymen in any apprenticeable trade on such contracts and if other contractors on the public works site are making such contributions.

The Contractor and any subcontractor will comply with Labor Code §§ 1777.5 and 1777.6 in the employment of apprentices.

Information relative to apprenticeship standards, wage schedules and other requirements may be obtained from the Director of Industrial Relations, ex-officio the Administrator of Apprenticeship, San Francisco, California, or from the Division of Apprenticeship Standards and its branch offices.

34. RECORD OF WAGES PAID: INSPECTION

Every Contractor and subcontractor will keep an accurate certified payroll records showing the name, occupation, and the actual per diem wages paid to each worker employed in connection with the Work. The record will be kept open at all reasonable hours to the inspection of the body awarding the contract and to the Department of Industrial Relations. If requested by the City, the Contractor will provide copies of the records at its cost.

35. LIABILITY INSURANCE

Contractor must comply with City’s insurance requirements for public works projects which are either adopted by City Council resolution or promulgated by the City Manager, or designee (the “Insurance Matrix”). Contractor will provide endorsements or other proof of coverage for contractual liability in accordance with the Insurance Matrix.

The cost of such insurance will be included in the various items of work in the Contractor’s bid and no additional compensation for purchasing insurance or additional coverage needed to meet these requirements will be allowed.

In the event that any required insurance is reduced in coverage, cancelled for any reason, voided or suspended, Contractor agrees that City may arrange for insurance coverage as specified, and Contractor further agrees that administrative and premium costs may be deducted from payments due to the Contractor. Contractor will not be allowed to work until alternate coverage is arranged.

Coverage will not extend to any indemnity coverage for the active negligence of the additional insured if the agreement to indemnify the additional insured would be invalid under Civil Code § 2782(b).

36. INDEMNIFICATION AND DEFENSE
-62-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-22

In addition to all other provisions of the Contract Documents including, without limitation, the Greenbook, as between the City and Contractor, Contractor will take and assume all responsibility for the work as stated herein or shown on the plans.

The Contractor will bear all losses and damages directly or indirectly resulting to it, to the City, its officers, employees, and agents, or to others on account of the performance or character of the work, unforeseen difficulties, accidents, traffic control, job site maintenance, or any other causes whatsoever.

The Contractor will assume the defense of and indemnify and save harmless the City of Bellflower, its officers, employees, and agents, from and against any and all claims, losses, damage, expenses and liability of every kind, nature, and description, directly or indirectly arising from the performance of the contract or work, regardless of responsibility for negligence, and from any and all claims, losses, damage, expenses, and liability, howsoever the same may be caused, resulting directly, or indirectly from the nature of the work covered by the contract, regardless of responsibility for negligence, to the fullest extent permitted by law. In accordance with Civil Code § 2782, nothing in this Section will require defense or indemnification for death, bodily injury, injury to property, or any other loss, damage or expense arising from the sole negligence or willful misconduct of the City, or its agents, servants or independent contractors who are directly responsible to the City, or for defects in design furnished by such persons. Moreover, nothing in this Section will apply to impose on the Contractor, or to relieve the City from, liability for active negligence of the City.

The City does not, and will not, waive any rights against the Contractor which it may have by reason of the aforesaid hold harmless agreements because of the acceptance by the City, or deposit with City by Contractor, of any insurance policies. This hold harmless agreement by the Contractor applies to all damages and claims for damages of every kind suffered or alleged to have been suffered by reasons of any of the aforesaid operations of Contractor, or any subcontractor, regardless of whether or not such insurance policies are determined to be applicable to any of such damages or claims for damages.

No act by the City, or its representatives in processing or accepting any plans, in releasing any bond, in inspecting or accepting any work, or of any other nature, will in any respect relieve the Contractor or anyone else from any legal responsibility, obligation or liability he might otherwise have.

37. PERMITS

The Contractor will apply for permits required by the City. These permits including, without limitation, a business license, will be issued on a “no-fee” basis. However, the Contractor must pay for and obtain all other permits from other governmental and utility agencies necessitated by their operations but cannot charge the City an administrative fee for obtaining such permits.

-63-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-23

All bonding fees, (overweight and oversized vehicle permit fees) inspection permit fees or other fees charged or required for such permits must be paid by the Contractor.

These costs will be included in the bid item provided. If no bid item is included, costs will be included in the various items of work, and no additional payment will be allowed.

38. CLEANUP AND DUST CONTROL

On any construction project requiring trenching within public streets and for which total trenching is in excess of 500 feet, the Contractor will be required to sweep the worksite utilizing a pick-up type of street sweeper a minimum of once daily.

39. WATERING

Water for dust control caused by Contractor’s operations or the passage of traffic through the work will be applied as necessary or as directed by the Public Works Director. Water for the above or other purposes may be obtained from any approved source. If the Contractor chooses to use a City fire hydrant, Contractor must contact the appropriate water purveyor to pay deposits and fees. Costs of water to be used will be included in the cost of various bid items.

40. WATER POLLUTION CONTROL

The following requirements are added to establish storm water and urban runoff pollution prevention controls.

Storm or construction generated water containing sediment such as, construction waste, soil, slurry from concrete/asphalt concrete saw cutting operations, clean-up of concrete transit mixers or other pollutants from construction sites and parking areas will be retained or controlled on site and will not be permitted to enter the storm drain system.

Temporary sediment filtering systems such as sandbags, silt fences, or gravel berms will be utilized to trap sediment so that only filtered water enters the City’s storm drain system. Proper clean up and disposal of settled sediment and the filtering system will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

Discharge of concrete transit mixer wash water on to approved dirt areas (sub-grade area designated for new concrete construction for example) is acceptable. Discharge on to private property, parkway areas, or the street is not permitted.

Plastic or other impervious covering will be installed where appropriate to prevent erosion of an otherwise unprotected area, along with any other runoff control devices deemed appropriate by the City.

Excavated soil stored on the site will be covered in a manner that minimizes the amount of sediments running into the storm drain system, street or adjoining properties.

-64-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-24

No washing of construction or other industrial vehicles and equipment will be allowed adjacent to a construction site. During the rainy season (October 15 to April 15), Contractor will keep at the construction site sufficient materials and labor to install temporary sediment filtering systems and other water pollution prevention control measures. These control measures will be in place and maintained by the Contractor on a daily basis on days when construction is not in progress due to rain.

All costs associated with water pollution control will be borne by the Contractor. Any expense incurred by the City to expeditiously respond to storm drain contamination resulting from Contractor’s failure to implement water pollution control measures will be charged to the Contractor.

41. PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING

IMPROVEMENTS

Where existing traffic striping, pavement markings, and curb markings are damaged or their reflectively reduced by the Contractor’s operations, such striping or markings will also be considered as existing improvements and the Contractor will replace such improvements.

Relocations, repairs, replacements, or re-establishments will be at least equal to the existing improvements and will match such improvements in finish and dimensions unless otherwise specified.

42. PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY

Unless otherwise specified all traffic control will be performed in accordance with the California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CA MUTCD), Latest Edition.

Building News, 3055 Overland Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90034, telephone 310-474- 7771.

43. TRAFFIC AND ACCESS

The Contractor will notify the occupants of all affected properties at least 48 hours before any temporary obstruction of access. Vehicular access to property line will be maintained except as required for construction for a reasonable period of time. No overnight closure of any driveway will be allowed except as permitted by the Public Works Director.

At least one, 12 foot wide, traffic lane will be provided for each direction of travel on all streets at all times except as permitted by the Public Works Director. The traffic lanes will be maintained on pavement and will remain unobstructed. All work requiring that a lane be closed, or a lane moved right or left will be noticed to the traveling public by use of City approved lighted arrow boards.

Clearances from traffic lanes will be five feet to the edge of any excavation and two feet to the face of any curb, pole, barricade, delineator, or other vertical obstruction.

-65-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-25

One four-foot-wide paved pedestrian walkway will be maintained in the parkway area on each side of all streets. The clearance from the pedestrian walkway to any traffic lane will be five feet. Pedestrians and vehicles will be protected from all excavations, material storage, and/or obstructions by the placement of an adequate number of lighted barricades (minimum two) at each location, one at each end of the obstruction or excavation), which will have flashing lights during darkness. Barricades will be Type I or Type II and lights will be Type A per the CA MUTCD.

44. STREET CLOSURES, DETOURS, BARRICADES

Street closures will not be allowed except as specifically permitted by the Public Works Director.

The Contractor will prepare any traffic control or detour plans in conformance with the California MUTCD, latest edition that may be required as directed by the Public Works Director. Lane transitions will not be sharper than a taper of 30 to one.

Temporary traffic channelization will be accomplished with barricades or delineators.

Temporary striping will not be allowed unless specifically permitted by the Public Works Director. The Contractor will prepare any plans that may be required for temporary striping to the satisfaction of the Public Works Director. In no event will temporary striping be allowed on finish pavement surfaces, which are to remain.

Where access to driveway or street crossings need to be maintained, minimum 1 1/4- inch-thick steel plating will be used to bridge the trench. All steel plating will have temporary asphalt concrete 1:12 minimum sloped ramps to assist vehicles to cross comfortably over the plates and have a non-skid surface. Plates subject to vehicle high traffic speeds and in residential areas will be secured by welding at the discretion of the Public Works Director.

45. PROTECTION OF THE PUBLIC

It is part of the service required of the Contractor to make whatever provisions are necessary to protect the public. The Contractor will use foresight and will take such steps and precautions as his operations warrant to protect the public from danger, loss of life or loss of property, which would result from interruption or contamination of public water supply, interruption of other public service, or from the failure of partly completed work or partially removed facilities. Unusual conditions may arise on the Project which will require that immediate and unusual provisions be made to protect the public from danger or loss of life, or damage to life and property, due directly or indirectly to prosecution of work under this contract.

Whenever, in the opinion of the Public Works Director, an emergency exists against which the Contractor has not taken sufficient precaution for the public safety, protection of utilities and protection of adjacent structures or property, which may be damaged by the Contractor’s operations and when, in the opinion of the Public Works Director, immediate action will be considered necessary in order to protect the public or property due to the Contractor’s operations under this contract, the Public Works -66-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-26

Director will order the Contractor to provide a remedy for the unsafe condition. If the Contractor fails to act on the situation immediately, the Public Works Director may provide suitable protection to said interests by causing such work to be done and material to be furnished as, in the opinion of the Public Works Director, may seem reasonable and necessary.

The cost and expense of said labor and material, together with the cost and expense of such repairs as are deemed necessary, will be borne by the Contractor. All expenses incurred by the City for emergency repairs will be deducted from the progress payments and the final payment due to the Contractor. Such remedial measures by the City will not relieve the Contractor from full responsibility for public safety.

46. HAZARDOUS MATERIAL

For any excavation, which extends more than four feet below existing grade, the Contractor will promptly, and before the conditions are disturbed, notify the Public Works Director, in writing, of 1) any material that the Contractor believes may be hazardous waste, as defined in Health and Safety Code § 25117, which is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law, 2) subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated, or 3) unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature, different materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents.

After receiving notice from the Contractor, the Public Works Director will promptly investigate any condition identified by the Contractor as being hazardous. The rights and obligations of the City and the Contractor with regard to such conditions (including, without limitation, the procedures for procuring change orders and filing claims) will be specified by the provisions of these Standard Specifications regarding Changed Conditions.

If a dispute arises between the City and the Contractor whether the conditions materially differ, involve hazardous waste, or cause a change in the Contractor’s cost or time required for performance of the work, the Contractor will not be excused from any scheduled completion date provided for by the contract, but will proceed with all work to be performed under the contract.

If the Public Works Director determines that material called to the Public Works Director’s attention by the Contractor is hazardous waste, or if the Public Works Director otherwise discovers the existence of hazardous waste, the Contractor will be responsible for removal and disposal of the hazardous waste by qualified personnel and appropriate equipment in the manner required by law as directed by the Public Works Director.

47. LUMP SUM WORK

Items for which quantities are indicated as “Lump Sum,” “L.S.,” or “Job” will be paid for at the price indicated in the Proposal. Such payment will be full compensation for all -67-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-27

costs for labor, equipment, materials and plant necessary to furnish, construct and install the lump sum item of work, complete, in place, and for all necessary appurtenant work, including, but not limited to, all necessary cutting, patching, repair and modification of existing facilities, and clean-up of site.

Contractor will furnish three copies of a detailed schedule, which breaks down the lump sum work into its component parts and cost for each part, in a form and sufficiently detailed as to satisfy Public Works Director that it correctly represents a reasonable apportionment of the lump sum. This schedule is subject to approval by Public Works Director as to both the components into which the lump sum item is broken down, and the proportion of cost attributable to each component.

This schedule will be the basis for progress payments for the lump sum work.

48. PARTIAL AND FINAL PAYMENTS

The closure date for the purpose of making partial progress payments will be the last working day of each month. The Contractor will prepare the partial payment invoice with measurement of the work performed through the closure date and submit it to City for approval.

When work is complete, the Contractor will determine the final quantities of the work performed and prepare the final progress payment and submit it to the Public Works Director for approval.

It will take a minimum of 35 calendar days from the date of approving the Contractor’s invoice to make the payment to the Contractor. However, payments will be withheld pending receipt of any outstanding reports required by the contract documents, or legal release of filed Stop Payment Notices against the Contractor. In addition, the final progress payment will not be released until the Contractor returns the control set of Plans and Specifications showing the as-built conditions.

The full five percent (5%) retention will be deducted from all progress payments. The Contractor will make a payment request for the retained amount, for approval by the City, upon field acceptance of the work by the City Public Works Director. The City Public Works Director upon field acceptance and receipt of the final as-built plans and any other reports or documents required to be provided by the Contractor will process a recommendation to the City for acceptance of the work. Not less than 35 calendar days from the City acceptance of the work, the Contractor’s final payment will be made provided Stop Payment Notices or other claims have not been filed against the Contractor and/or the City by material suppliers, sub- contractors, other governmental agencies, and private property owners. Until these Stop Payment Notices are released, and claims are resolved the stop payment/claim amount will be withheld from the final payment.

The Contractor, however, may receive interest on the retention for the length of construction, or receive the retention itself as long as the retention is substituted with escrow holder surety or equal value.
-68-

Standard Specifications
Specifications No. 22/23-06
SS-28

At the request and expense of the Contractor, surety equivalent to the retention may be deposited with the State Treasurer, or a State or Federally chartered bank, as the escrow agent, who will pay such surety to the Contractor upon satisfactory completion of the contract.

Pursuant to PCC § 22300, the Contractor may substitute securities for retention monies held by the City or request that the City place such monies into an escrow account.

The Contractor is notified, pursuant to PCC § 22300, that any such election will be at the Contractor’s own expense and will include costs incurred by the City to accommodate the Contractor’s request.

Progress payment paid by the City as contemplated herein, will be contingent upon the Contractor submitting, in addition to any additional documents, an updated Contract Schedule in the form prescribed by these Contract Documents. Failure of the Contractor to submit an acceptable updated Contract Schedule will result in the City withholding partial payment, without liability to the City, until such an acceptable updated Contract Schedule is submitted. Nothing herein will allow the Contractor to suspend or slow progress of the Work.

A City Council resolution established a Project Payment Account, encumbered money in the current budget, and assigned that money to the Project Payment Account which is the sole source of funds available for payment of the Contract Sum. Contractor understands and agrees that Contractor will be paid only from this special fund and if for any reason this fund is not sufficient to pay Contractor, Contractor will not be entitled to payment. The availability of money in this fund, and City’s ability to draw from this fund, are conditions precedent to City’s obligation to make payments to Contractor.

49. DELIVERED MATERIALS

Materials and equipment delivered or stored, but not incorporated into the work, will not be approved for progress payments.

50. TERMINATION OF AGENCY LIABILITY

Before receiving final payment, the Contractor will execute a “Release on Contract” form which will operate as, and will be a release to the City, the City Council, and each member of the City Council and their agencies, from all claims and liability to the Contractor for anything done or furnished for, or relating to, the work or for any act of neglect of the City of any person relating to or affecting the work, except the claim against the City for the remainder, if any there be, of the amounts kept or retained as in these Standard Specifications and except for any unsettled claims listed on said form which have been filed in compliance with the requirements for making claims.

- END OF SECTION
-69-

Standard Specifications Specifications No. 22/23-06 SS-29 -70-

§ 9204. Legislative findings and declarations regarding timely..., CA PUB CONT § 9204 © 2021 Thomson Reuters. No claim to original U.S. Government Works.1 West's Annotated California Codes
Public Contract Code (Refs & Annos)
Division 2. General Provisions (Refs & Annos)
Part 1. Administrative Provisions (Refs & Annos)
Chapter 9. Claims and Disputes (Refs & Annos)
West's Ann.Cal.Pub.Con.Code § 9204
§ 9204. Legislative findings and declarations regarding timely and complete payment of contractors for public works projects; claims process Effective: January 1, 2020
Currentness
(a) The Legislature finds and declares that it is in the best interests of the state and its citizens to ensure that all construction business performed on a public works project in the state that is complete and not in dispute is paid in full and in a timely manner. (b) Notwithstanding any other law, including, but not limited to, Article 7.1 (commencing with Section 10240) of Chapter 1 of Part 2, Chapter 10 (commencing with Section 19100) of Part 2, and Article 1.5 (commencing with Section 20104) of Chapter 1 of Part 3, this section shall apply to any claim by a contractor in connection with a public works project. (c) For purposes of this section:
(1) “Claim” means a separate demand by a contractor sent by registered mail or certified mail with return receipt requested, for one or more of the following:
(A) A time extension, including, without limitation, for relief from damages or penalties for delay assessed by a public entity under a contract for a public works project.
(B) Payment by the public entity of money or damages arising from work done by, or on behalf of, the contractor pursuant to the contract for a public works project and payment for which is not otherwise expressly provided or to which the claimant is not otherwise entitled.
(C) Payment of an amount that is disputed by the public entity. (2) “Contractor” means any type of contractor within the meaning of Chapter 9 (commencing with Section 7000) of Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code who has entered into a direct contract with a public entity for a public works project. (3)(A) “Public entity” means, without limitation, except as provided in subparagraph (B), a state agency, department, office, division, bureau, board, or commission, the California State University, the University of California, a city, including a charter city, county, including a charter county, city and county, including a charter city and county, district, special district, public -71-

§ 9204. Legislative findings and declarations regarding timely..., CA PUB CONT § 9204 © 2021 Thomson Reuters. No claim to original U.S. Government Works.2 authority, political subdivision, public corporation, or nonprofit transit corporation wholly owned by a public agency and formed to carry out the purposes of the public agency.
(B) “Public entity” shall not include the following:
(i) The Department of Water Resources as to any project under the jurisdiction of that department. (ii) The Department of Transportation as to any project under the jurisdiction of that department. (iii) The Department of Parks and Recreation as to any project under the jurisdiction of that department. (iv) The Department of Corrections and Rehabilitation with respect to any project under its jurisdiction pursuant to Chapter 11 (commencing with Section 7000) of Title 7 of Part 3 of the Penal Code. (v) The Military Department as to any project under the jurisdiction of that department. (vi) The Department of General Services as to all other projects. (vii) The High-Speed Rail Authority.
(4) “Public works project” means the erection, construction, alteration, repair, or improvement of any public structure, building, road, or other public improvement of any kind.
(5) “Subcontractor” means any type of contractor within the meaning of Chapter 9 (commencing with Section 7000) of Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code who either is in direct contract with a contractor or is a lower tier subcontractor. (d)(1)(A) Upon receipt of a claim pursuant to this section, the public entity to which the claim applies shall conduct a reasonable review of the claim and, within a period not to exceed 45 days, shall provide the claimant a written statement identifying what portion of the claim is disputed and what portion is undisputed. Upon receipt of a claim, a public entity and a contractor may, by mutual agreement, extend the time period provided in this subdivision. (B) The claimant shall furnish reasonable documentation to support the claim. (C) If the public entity needs approval from its governing body to provide the claimant a written statement identifying the disputed portion and the undisputed portion of the claim, and the governing body does not meet within the 45 days or within the mutually agreed to extension of time following receipt of a claim sent by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, the public entity shall have up to three days following the next duly publicly noticed meeting of the governing body after the 45-day period, or extension, expires to provide the claimant a written statement identifying the disputed portion and the undisputed portion.
-72-

§ 9204. Legislative findings and declarations regarding timely..., CA PUB CONT § 9204 © 2021 Thomson Reuters. No claim to original U.S. Government Works.3 (D) Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and made within 60 days after the public entity issues its written statement. If the public entity fails to issue a written statement, paragraph (3) shall apply. (2)(A) If the claimant disputes the public entity's written response, or if the public entity fails to respond to a claim issued pursuant to this section within the time prescribed, the claimant may demand in writing an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon receipt of a demand in writing sent by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, the public entity shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute. (B) Within 10 business days following the conclusion of the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion of the claim remains in dispute, the public entity shall provide the claimant a written statement identifying the portion of the claim that remains in dispute and the portion that is undisputed. Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and made within 60 days after the public entity issues its written statement. Any disputed portion of the claim, as identified by the contractor in writing, shall be submitted to nonbinding mediation, with the public entity and the claimant sharing the associated costs equally. The public entity and claimant shall mutually agree to a mediator within 10 business days after the disputed portion of the claim has been identified in writing. If the parties cannot agree upon a mediator, each party shall select a mediator and those mediators shall select a qualified neutral third party to mediate with regard to the disputed portion of the claim. Each party shall bear the fees and costs charged by its respective mediator in connection with the selection of the neutral mediator. If mediation is unsuccessful, the parts of the claim remaining in dispute shall be subject to applicable procedures outside this section.
(C) For purposes of this section, mediation includes any nonbinding process, including, but not limited to, neutral evaluation or a dispute review board, in which an independent third party or board assists the parties in dispute resolution through negotiation or by issuance of an evaluation. Any mediation utilized shall conform to the timeframes in this section. (D) Unless otherwise agreed to by the public entity and the contractor in writing, the mediation conducted pursuant to this section shall excuse any further obligation under Section 20104.4 to mediate after litigation has been commenced. (E) This section does not preclude a public entity from requiring arbitration of disputes under private arbitration or the Public Works Contract Arbitration Program, if mediation under this section does not resolve the parties' dispute. (3) Failure by the public entity to respond to a claim from a contractor within the time periods described in this subdivision or to otherwise meet the time requirements of this section shall result in the claim being deemed rejected in its entirety. A claim that is denied by reason of the public entity's failure to have responded to a claim, or its failure to otherwise meet the time requirements of this section, shall not constitute an adverse finding with regard to the merits of the claim or the responsibility or qualifications of the claimant.
(4) Amounts not paid in a timely manner as required by this section shall bear interest at 7 percent per annum. (5) If a subcontractor or a lower tier subcontractor lacks legal standing to assert a claim against a public entity because privity of contract does not exist, the contractor may present to the public entity a claim on behalf of a subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor. A subcontractor may request in writing, either on their own behalf or on behalf of a lower tier subcontractor, that the contractor present a claim for work which was performed by the subcontractor or by a lower tier subcontractor on behalf of the subcontractor. The subcontractor requesting that the claim be presented to the public entity shall furnish reasonable -73-

§ 9204. Legislative findings and declarations regarding timely..., CA PUB CONT § 9204 © 2021 Thomson Reuters. No claim to original U.S. Government Works.4 documentation to support the claim. Within 45 days of receipt of this written request, the contractor shall notify the subcontractor in writing as to whether the contractor presented the claim to the public entity and, if the original contractor did not present the claim, provide the subcontractor with a statement of the reasons for not having done so. (e) The text of this section or a summary of it shall be set forth in the plans or specifications for any public works project that may give rise to a claim under this section.
(f) A waiver of the rights granted by this section is void and contrary to public policy, provided, however, that (1) upon receipt of a claim, the parties may mutually agree to waive, in writing, mediation and proceed directly to the commencement of a civil action or binding arbitration, as applicable; and (2) a public entity may prescribe reasonable change order, claim, and dispute resolution procedures and requirements in addition to the provisions of this section, so long as the contractual provisions do not conflict with or otherwise impair the timeframes and procedures set forth in this section. (g) This section applies to contracts entered into on or after January 1, 2017. (h) Nothing in this section shall impose liability upon a public entity that makes loans or grants available through a competitive application process, for the failure of an awardee to meet its contractual obligations. (i) This section shall remain in effect only until January 1, 2027, and as of that date is repealed, unless a later enacted statute that is enacted before January 1, 2027, deletes or extends that date.

Credits
(Added by Stats.2016, c. 810 (A.B.626), § 1, eff. Jan. 1, 2017. Amended by Stats.2019, c. 489 (A.B.456), § 1, eff. Jan. 1, 2020.) Editors' Notes
REPEAL

West's Ann. Cal. Pub. Con. Code § 9204, CA PUB CONT § 9204 Current with urgency legislation through Ch. 13 of 2021 Reg.Sess End of Document © 2021 Thomson Reuters. No claim to original U.S. Government Works. -74-

FILE: -CONST SPECS BELLFLOWER 1

CITY OF BELLFLOWER

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
for

FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION OF

GATEWAY SIGN
June 06, 2022
All rights to this document and the associated design intent drawings are reserved by Graphic Solutions. These documents may not be reproduced or used, in whole or in part, without the express written permission of Graphic Solutions. Graphic Solutions grants the City of Bellflower and it’s contractors permission to use and/or reproduce these documents only in conjunction with the bidding and administration of the fabrication and installation of the Gateway Sign at the intersection of Alondra Blvd. and Bellflower Blvd. in the City of Bellflower. Use of these documents for any other project is strictly prohibited.

Technical Provisions
Specifications No. 22/23-06
-75-

FILE: -CONST SPECS BELLFLOWER 2
INDEX

CONTENTS PAGE
SECTION 1 SIGN SCHEDULE ........................................................................................................ 3 SECTION 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 3 SECTION 3 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 5 SECTION 4 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 7 SECTION 5 EXECUTION .............................................................................................................. 11 -76-

FILE: -CONST SPECS BELLFLOWER 3
SECTION 1

SIGN SCHEDULE

1.01 LOCATION:

The work is to be performed at southwest corner of Alondra Blvd. and Bellflower Blvd. in the City of Bellflower, California.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

The Sign Contractor shall perform all work necessary to furnish, deliver and install all items shown on the Design Intent Drawings and specified herein, including preparation of digital files, typefonts and camera- ready art for use in production. The fabricator shall be responsible for developing all signs based on the typical concepts shown in the drawings, including typographical refinements such as margins, kerning, leading, line breaks and spacing, necessary to complete the work.

SECTION 2

GENERAL CONDITIONS

2.01 INSTRUCTION RELATING TO EXISTING CONDITIONS:

The Sign Contractor shall take measurements at the site and shall check all measurements and grades on the contract drawings or subsequent drawings. Such information given on the contract drawings and in the specifications relative to existing conditions has been obtained from sources believed to be reliable, but shall be subject to verification in the field. The contractor must field verify exact locations and conditions for each sign and notify the City in writing, of any discrepancies, omissions, or clarifications as they affect sign design or location.

2.02 EXAMINATION OF SITE DOCUMENTS:

Before submitting a proposal, the Sign Contractor should carefully examine the Design Intent Drawings and Construction Specifications, visit the site and fully inform themselves as to all existing conditions and limitations. Should any discrepancies or omissions from the drawings and specifications be found, or should there be any doubt as to their meaning, he should notify the City at once, in writing.

Sign Contractor shall participate in a pre-production conference with the City’s representative and the Architect to review the contract requirements, clarify the scope and nature of the work as outlined in the Drawings and Specifications, to establish clear lines of responsibility and checkpoints for the performance of the work.

2.03 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS:

The Sign Contractor shall have been continuously engaged in fabrication of similar work for a minimum of five (5) years. The Sign Contractor shall warrant and guarantee that none but experienced workmen will be employed on the work and that all items fabricated and/or provided by him shall be of the best of their respective kinds. The Sign Contractor certifies that he is able to furnish sufficient forces to ensure prosecution of the work in accordance with approved progress schedules and that he can furnish a work force that can work in harmony with all elements of labor employed in the work and at the site of the work.

2.04 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY:

The Sign Contractor shall be responsible for the work until it is acceptable by the City, and the Sign Contractor shall cover and protect all items from damage during transportation, storage and installation. If any loss or damage occurs prior to acceptance by the City, the Sign Contractor shall promptly repair or replace the part or parts lost or damaged, as directed by the City, at no cost to the City.

-77-

FILE: -CONST SPECS BELLFLOWER 4
The Sign Contractor shall also be responsible for any loss or damage to the City’s property and to the property of others due to operations under Contact and shall make good, at his own expense and to the complete satisfaction of the City, such loss or damage.

The Sign Contractor shall package materials and supplies in biodegradable packing whenever possible.

2.05 SUPERVISION:

The Sign Contractor shall provide all necessary supervision by a person especially qualified and experienced in handling the work covered in his proposal. This individual and his qualifications shall be satisfactory to and approved by the City. The Sign Contractor shall consult with the Graphic Designer should any error or inconsistency develop in the drawings and specifications and if there is any doubt, in no case shall the Sign Contractor proceed with the work without approval. The Sign Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the proper laying-out of his work and for any damages that may occur because of his errors or inaccuracies.

2.06 COORDINATION:

The Sign Contractor shall coordinate all activities related to the work with the City’s designated site superintendent. It shall be the Sign Contractor’s responsibility to meet any construction schedules required by the General Contractors due to related site work.

The Sign Contractor shall also be responsible for coordinating his work with that of all other trades at the job site and for coordinating excavations as necessary to protect below-grade utilities, irrigation lines, telephone lines, and cable TV lines.

2.07 GUARANTEE AND/OR WARRANTY:

The Sign Contractor shall agree to bring all portions of work to entire completion free of all defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the completed work by the City. Digital prints to be warranted for a minimum 5 years against fading cracking, chipping and peeling.

Defects include but are not limited to: electrolytic decomposition; oxidation; dislocation of fasteners, anchors, welds or any other connecting devices; de-lamination; pitting of surfaces or finishes; non-adhesion; warping, canning or other distortions of uniform surfaces; fading or discoloration.

The Sign Contractor also guarantees, within a reasonable time after receipt of written notice thereof, to make good any defects in materials and/or workmanship which may develop within such period for which materials and workmanship are warranted, and to pay or cause to be paid for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which may develop during the period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the completed work by the City.

-78-

FILE: -CONST SPECS BELLFLOWER 5
SECTION 3

SUBMITTALS

3.01 PRODUCTION SCHEDULE

The sign fabricator is to submit a Production Schedule to City for approval prior to any work beginning, including and accounting for contractor’s full scope of services, appropriate lead times for all products ordered as part of this work, and including installation of all approved signs to completion of work.

Fabricator should designate all deliverable dates, including all Submittals and Samples as noted in this section, and allowing for appropriate review time by City. Once agreed upon with City, the Fabricator is responsible for meeting all schedule milestones, and if not able to do so, must notify the City of any issues as they arise and prior to any approved deadlines.

3.02 SAMPLES:

Samples shall be labeled on the backside with the Project Name, the Submittal # (i.e. 1,2 etc.), the Design Intent designation (i.e. P2, V1, etc.), a description (i.e. paint to match DE3544 semi-gloss with anti-graffiti coating, etc.). Sign Contractor shall submit three (3) complete sets of samples of the following to the City for approval prior to fabrication:

A. Typical pop-through letter in specified material and finish, as required.

B. Material samples for each designated paint color and surface finish including:

1. Metal:

Submit actual production sections showing coating color and finish for aluminum and steel (4 samples per color on 4"x 4" squares)

2. Acrylics:

Submit samples of acrylic / plastic materials for the various applications in their finished state and data describing the materials and finishes.

3. Sealant / Silicone:

Submit sample of sealant and silicone where color match is required.

4. Paints and lacquers:

Submit (4) 4" x 4" square samples per finish.

5. Anti-Graffiti:

Samples of anti-graffiti coatings on appropriate surfaces, satin finish clear coat over paint & vinyl type
C. Additional samples for typestyles, materials and finishes as required.

D. Cut-sheets and supplemental information for each type of light fixture to be utilized.

The above samples, when approved, shall establish standards for materials, colors, finishes and quality of workmanship. Completed work shall exactly match the standards established by the approved samples, or work will be rejected.

3.03 SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. Sign Contractor is responsible for obtaining Architectural Drawings from City or his representatives upon award of contract. Within two (2) weeks after award of Contract, Sign Contractor shall provide City with locations, sizes and treatments of access panels and backings required for signs. Such information along with estimated sign weights should be represented on the Architectural Drawings and submitted along with a feed letter specifying electrical requirements for signs (see Section 4.01) to City and its representatives.

Where insufficient structural support for signs occurs, the Sign Contractor is responsible for coordinating with City and his representatives.
-79-

FILE: -CONST SPECS BELLFLOWER 6
B. Sign Contractor shall submit three (3) complete sets of fully dimensioned Shop Drawings to the City for approval prior to fabrication or email pdf files to all parties responsible for reviewing the Drawings. The cover shall state the initial submittal date and subsequent revision dates, and identify the package as Submittal 1, Submittal 2, etc. If the Shop Drawings are broken into components and submitted at different times, then in addition, the cover will identify which sign types are included in each submittal.

The Shop Drawing shall include a table of contents listing each sign type alphabetically and where it can be found within the drawings.

C. The Shop Drawing submittal shall incorporate all stated elements of the Design Intent Drawings, the stamped engineering calculations, and the specifications outlined in Sections 4 and 5 herein. The shop drawings are expected to include additional details that are not shown on the Design Intent Drawings (see C and D below). It is not acceptable for the Sign Contractor to copy/repackage Graphic Solutions Design Intent Drawings and label them as “shop drawings.” All such submittals shall be rejected.

Any Digital Files of the Design Intent Drawings requested by the Sign Contractor will be sent as is (Mac Illustrator CC or PDF. Procurement of typefonts as well as corrections and or adjustments to Digital Files necessary to gain approval of Shop Drawings and Production Art is the sole responsibility of the Sign Contractor.

D. Shop Drawings shall establish the actual detail of all manufactured or fabricated items and shall include specifications for the paint system (Matthews Paint System or equivalent linear polyurethane with city approval) to be used for signage/graphics as well as specifications for all required electrical fixtures and components. Drawings shall also indicate proper relation to existing work, reflect all structural engineering requirements, and incorporate changes of design or construction, as directed by the City, to suit actual field conditions. In addition, drawings shall indicate internal structural supports; adhesives; exact location and treatment of seams and joints; thickness of materials; exact location of access panels and safety switches; footing details; and details of installation, including sign attachments. Scaled drawings will show each sign type in elevation and plan dimensioning its position in relationship to the architectural or landscape setting
E. Shop drawings shall also indicate the source and location of electrical service for each sign installation, as well as complete specifications for all electrical fixtures and components.

F. All shop drawings and construction details must be fully dimensioned. Use 1-1/2" = 1'-0" minimum for construction details.

G. Sign Contractor must continue to revise rejected plans and resubmit until approval is obtained. For initial submittal and re-submittals, the Sign Contractor shall work from one set of drawings (i.e., this one set of drawings must incorporate all previous revisions/adjustments).

H. Drawings not in compliance with all of these requirements shall be rejected.

I. A complete Shop Drawing set and Sign Schedule containing all signs with all revisions/adjustments shall be provided by the Sign Contractor to each party responsible for reviewing installed signs prior to the punch list date.

3.04 PATTERNS AND/OR PHOTO-READY ART:

A. Prior to fabrication, Sign Contractor shall submit full-size letter form and work spacing patterns of all graphics for approval by the Graphic Designer, and include installation / attachment methods as required.

B. Sign Contractor shall submit patterns and/or digital art for other elements as may be requested by the Graphic Designer.

C. Sign Contractor shall be responsible for submitting signs to and gaining approval from all local, state and federal authorities having jurisdiction over the project. Any changes resulting from this process must be reviewed and approved by the City and the Graphic Designer prior to fabrication.

3.05 ENGINEERING CALCULATIONS:
-80-

FILE: -CONST SPECS BELLFLOWER 7
Stamped engineering calculations may be provided for some sign types. The Sign Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing these and determining if any additional engineering will be required for these sign types and for resolving any discrepancies that may exist between the engineering and the details of the Design Intent Drawings.

The Sign Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for structural engineering calculations for any sign types that have not been engineered and for any additional structural engineering that may be required in connection with the work. If engineering affects the size and shape of the intended forms as shown on the Bid Drawings, the Sign Contractor must notify the General Contractor prior to submittal of Shop Drawings. Engineering is to be submitted to the City for approval in conjunction with shop drawing submittal.

City reserves the right to make changes, adjustments, or alterations to the Design Intent Drawings and/or to sign configurations subsequent to distribution of the Contract Documents to bidders. In which case, the selected Sign Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for any additional engineering that may be required.

Note: All rejected samples, shop drawings, patterns, artwork, engineering, etc. must be revised and re- submitted to the Graphic Designer until approval is obtained. A full set of final plans must be approved and stamped by the City and/or Graphic Designer prior to permit application or sign fabrication.

3.06 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:

One complete set of drawings reflecting the as-built condition of all signs shall be submitted to the City within 30 days of acceptance of the work. This set of drawings shall incorporate all details of the work - - references to previous drawings or submittals are not acceptable. If Shop Drawings were broken into separate packages, the As Built Drawings must include a comprehensive cover that identifies each sub-package and a comprehensive table of contents that lists all signs alphabetically showing which sub-package and page they can be found on.

SECTION 4

PRODUCTS

4.01 MATERIALS: BASIC
A. Aluminum:

1. Extrusions and rolled material shall have a strength and durability no less than that which is specified in ASTM B 221 for alloy 6063-T5. Sheets shall have a strength and durability no less than that which is specified in ASTM B 209 for alloy 5052-H32. All exposed aluminum shall have a quality finish suitable for painting.

2. Material shall be of highest visual grade, free of mill marks, nicks, pits, gouges and other imperfections.

3. All welds shall be continuous. Where appropriate, exceptions may be granted as part of the shop drawing review. Welding shall be of the correct type to minimize permanent distortion of flat surfaces. Visible welds are to be filled and ground smooth. Welds shall comply with standards established by the American Welding Society, and the Aluminum Association.

4. All visible parts shall be ground smooth and filled before painting so that no grinding abrasions are apparent and there is no distortion of the intended form.

5. All aluminum shall be of sufficient gauge to prevent warping and canning. Warped or canned sign faces or backs shall be unacceptable.

6. Aluminum cabinets shall be welded and finished so as to appear seamless. -81-

FILE: -CONST SPECS BELLFLOWER 8

7. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete, the aluminum material shall be coated with coal tar epoxy.

8. All seams shall be water-tight.

9. Use Matthews Paint System (or equivalent with City approval).

B. Steel:

1. All steel material shall adhere to specifications A.1 through A.5 above.

2. All exposed steel shall be urethane coated. Use a high solids, low VOC, two-component aliphatic urethane semi-gloss enamel formulated for use in commercial and industrial applications were color retention and a durable long-lasting coating is required Apply 3 coats minimum for a dry film thickness of 5 mils.

3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Intent Drawings, sheet metal shall be 18 gauge white galvanized for letter faces and 24 gauge white galvanized for letter returns for reverse channel letterforms. All other sheet metal shall be 18 gauge unless otherwise specified.

4. Unless otherwise specified, Tube Steel shall conform to ASTM A501 Grade B; Steel Pipe shall conform to ASTM A53 Grade B; Steel rolled shapes shall conform to ASTM A36.

C. Miscellaneous Metal:

1. All metal materials shall be new stock, free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance, and of such gauge to prevent warping or canning.

2. Surface finish shall be smooth, free of extrusion marks or imperfections. Alloy selected must meet structural requirements of the specific application.

3. Metal materials shall be painted as follows
a. Shop prime coat: zinc chromate primer for steel; acid wash primer for aluminum. b. Acrylic urethane with semi-gloss finish, minimum 2 mil thick.

D. Acrylic:

1. As referred to in this document, acrylic shall include Plexiglas, Lexan and any other plastic material that may be specified in the Design Intent Drawings.

2. Acrylic material shall be new stock free from defects, and manufactured by Rohm & Haas or approved equivalent.

3. All work or cut edges shall be free of saw marks and chips and shall be polished mechanically with an appropriate compound. Flame polishing shall not be acceptable. Edges shall be square to the face.

4. Where acrylic parts meet or are joined in any manner, surface planes shall be flush and fee from gaps.

5. No discoloration from bonding solvent shall be apparent on acrylic sign faces.

E. Adhesive:

1. Type and usage shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular conditions and project requirements.
a. Identify each type and usage on Shop Drawings.
b. Include data describing method of application.
-82-

FILE: -CONST SPECS BELLFLOWER 9

2. Adhesives that will fade, discolor, or delaminate as result of exposure to ultraviolet light or heat, or that change the color of or deteriorate the condition of the materials to which they are applied shall not be used. Adhesives must not be seen from public view.

F. Inks, Paints and Lacquers:

1. Products that will face, discolor or delaminate as a result of exposure to ultraviolet light source or heat therefrom shall not be used.

2. Prepare surfaces per manufacturer’s specifications prior to painting. Include, as a part of this work, prime coats (such as Matthews One-Coat 74-734 and Matthews Metal Pre-Treatment 74-735) and other surface pre-treatments (such as zinc chromate or acid wash), where recommended by the manufacturer for inks, paints and lacquers. Porous material should be filled sanded smooth and primed prior to painting unless indicated otherwise.

3. All paint shall be spray applied. Concrete surfaces may be rollered or brushed provided there are no streaks or uneven textures. Pretreatment of surfaces and spray application of paint shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

4. Inks, paints and lacquers shall be applied without pinholes, scratches, peeling, application marks, etc.
a. Back lighted or internally illuminated panels containing defects that cause light leaks in surface areas intended to be opaque will not be accepted.

5. All paint for metal signage, unless otherwise specified, shall be acrylic aliphatic isocyanate/acrylic polyurethane with ultraviolet (UV) inhibitors and formulated for exterior use in colors specified on the Design Intent Drawings or as otherwise specified by the Graphic Designer. Paint is to be the highest quality recommended by the manufacturer for specific surfaces. For steel surfaces, see section 4.01, B.

6. Paint is to be applied to all interior and exterior surfaces and edges of metal parts and components unless otherwise noted and approved.

7. All finish coats should be satin unless otherwise specified or approved as part of the Shop Drawings.

G. Letterforms and Spacing:

1. All letterforms, typestyles and spacing shall be as specified on Design Intent Drawings.

2. Letterforms with rounded positive or negative corners resulting from the cutting/fabricating process will not be accepted. Corners of fabricated letterforms must be as sharp as intended in the typefont.

H. Graphics:

1. All graphic images shall be accurately reproduced. Lettering that approximates typestyles shall not be acceptable. Camera-ready or computer-generated layouts and patterns are to be approved for all signs by the Graphic Designer prior to production.

I. Hardware, Fasteners and Gaskets:

1. All exposed hardware shall match adjacent surfaces unless specifically noted otherwise.

2. All dissimilar metals shall be separated with 3M Scotchrap™ All Weather Corrosion Protection Tape to prevent electrolysis. Surface to be prepared with Scotchrap™ Pipe Primer before applying tape.

3. In addition to the tape in (2) above, stainless steel screws or fasteners shall be used to secure ferrous to non-ferrous metals.
-83-

FILE: -CONST SPECS BELLFLOWER 10

4. Unless otherwise specified in the Design Intent Drawings, screws shall be flathead metal. Exposed screws shall be countersunk, and screw heads shall be finished to match the surrounding sign finish and color. Exact locations, sizes, and centers of screws shall be noted on the Shop Drawings.

5. All exposed bolt and screw heads accessible to the public shall be tamper resistant and shall be specified in shop drawing submittal.

J. LED (Light Emitting Diode illumination):

1. Sign Contractor shall use highest quality LED by Nichia, CREE, or equivalent. Minimum life span for White – 50,000 hours; Blue – 50,000 hours; Red – 100,000 hours.

2. Adequate cooling / venting for LED’s and power supply should be used per manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent over heating.

3. LED’s should be arranged to provide even color and lighting with no hot spots or dark areas.

K. Concrete:

1. Concrete footings for freestanding signs shall be approved structural footing mix (1" rock) and prepared per manufacturer’s specifications, with a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3,250 pounds per square inch. Unless indicated otherwise, footings shall be reinforced with #4 steel re-bar at 12" on center. Provide details in Shop Drawings. Finish of exposed concrete sign base shall be as indicated on Design Intent Drawings and shall be free of any form impressions.

2. Concrete Specifications:
a. Portland Cement Concrete: Class 560-C-3250. Type as specified on the Drawings unless otherwise approved by the Structural Engineer.
b. Aggregates:
1) Footings: ASTM C 33, regular concrete
c. Water: Clean, drinkable. Water shall not contain more than 1,000 mg/L (ppm) of chlorides calculated as C1, nor more than 1,000 mg/L (ppm) of sulfates calculated as SO4. d. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 per approved mix design. e. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494. Type A per approved mix design. f. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615. Grade 60, epoxy coated with 3” minimum cover. g. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185: flat sheets only.

3. Concrete to be painted should be primed with Epicoat, Tilt-Up Concrete Sealer (or equivalent) and painted with Frazee Duratec Exterior Latex (or equivalent). Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for surface preparation.

4.02 ELECTRICAL FIXTURES:

A. Automatic Time Switch:

1. Where specified, Sign Contractor shall furnish and install a Time Switch for automatic on-off control of sign lighting. Time Switch shall be INTEMATIC ET70000C series or equal.

2. The electronic Time Switch shall be a solid state digital type capable of distributing set points on independent daily schedules throughout a 7 day time period. The Time Switch shall provide for 5 weekday program entry for typical 5/2 day load control. The Time Switch shall provide astronomic programming and momentary or interval programming for any or all circuits independently. The Time Switch shall provide full year control by providing automatic leap year and daylight saving -84-

FILE: -CONST SPECS BELLFLOWER 11 time adjustment. The Time Switch shall also provide holiday or special day control requirements by providing up to 99 holiday schedules.

3. Where specified, Sign Contractor shall furnish and install a Photo Control for “On-Off” control of sign lighting. Photo Control shall be INTERMATIC K4000 series or equal.

B. Light Fixtures:

1. Unless otherwise noted in the drawings, Sign Contractor shall specify the light fixtures to be used and shall provide cut-sheets and supplemental information (e.g., color, size, mounting detail) for City and/or Architect approval.

C. Ground Lighting:

1. Use Kim vault light fixture LTV32 WW, 70MH120 unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.

2. Position fixtures to provide even illumination across face of sign.

SECTION 5

EXECUTION

5.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE:

A. Within one (1) week after award of Contract, Sign Contractor shall provide City with a list of (a) load requirements (amperage/voltage) for all electrical sign components, (b) specific locations for each concealed J box location and (c) location and size of all transformers and access panels for servicing and wiring of signs.

City shall provide conduit and electrical service within ten feet of each sign location, including junction boxes and dedicated sign circuits as indicated on the electrical drawings. Sign Contractor shall configure the electrical components of signs so as not to exceed the power available at each location. Prior to completion of fabrication, Sign Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that adequate power is available to each location. If adequate power is not available, Sign Contractor shall at no additional cost, adjust sign electrical components as necessary to operate signs using the actual service available at each location.

B. Sign Contractor shall extend conduit and wiring provided at each sign location into the sign structure through the sign footing or other concealed pathway, including any below-grade junction boxes.

Electrical runs shall be internalized in sign components, columns, and mounting structures with hollow metal components when available. Visible external electrical fixtures or conduit shall not be allowed.

Where field conditions prevent concealment of conduit, sign contractor is to use least visible route. Such exposed conduit will be painted to match background. Electrical cut-off switches shall be flush with the sign surface and on the sign surface facing away from the street or pedestrian entrance unless otherwise indicated on the Design Intent Drawings. Switch plates shall be finished to match surrounding surface.

C. Sign Contractor shall be responsible for effecting the final connection of the electrical components to the electrical service and assuring that the electrical fixtures for each sign are operational.

D. Sign Contractor shall use Underwriter’s Laboratory-approved components, and UL-approved labels shall be affixed to all electrical fixtures.

E. Sign Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the City, contractor and their subcontractors as necessary for expeditious performance of all electrical work related to signage.

F. Service-disconnect switches shall be in waterproof boot, installed in custom fabricated, flush mounted switch plate, and positioned away from the street.

-85-

FILE: -CONST SPECS BELLFLOWER 12

5.02 CONSTRUCTION:

A. Signs must be of durable rust-inhibited materials that are appropriate and complementary to the building.

B. All formed metal, such as letterforms, shall be fabricated using full-weld construction unless otherwise noted and approved. Formed metal sign components shall be bent on a continuous curve without apparent elbows or kinks.

C. Dissimilar metals shall be separated with non-conductive 3M Scotchrap™ All Weather Corrosion Protection Tape to prevent electrolysis and secured with stainless steel fasteners as required.

D. Paint colors must be reviewed and approved by the City. Color coatings shall exactly match the colors specified on the approved plans.

E. Surfaces with color mixes and hues prone to fading (e.g., pastels, fluorescent, complex mixtures, and intense reds, yellows and purples) shall be coated with ultraviolet-inhibiting clear coat in a matte or semi-gloss finish unless otherwise noted and approved.

F. Joining of materials (e.g., seams) shall be finished in such a way as to be tight, secure and unnoticeable (i.e., butted seams). Overlapped seams shall be considered unacceptable. Visible welds shall be continuous and ground smooth. Rivets, screws, and other fasteners that extend to visible surfaces shall be flush, filled, and finished so as to be unnoticeable.

G. Finished surfaces of metal shall be free from canning and warping. Flat surfaces shall have faces of such flatness that when measured from corner to corner along the diagonal, the maximum deviation from the nominal plane of surface shall not exceed 1/16" for measured distances up to 5'-0".

H. All sign finishes shall be free of dust, orange peel, drips, and runs and shall have a uniform surface conforming to the highest standards of the industry.

I. All lighting must match the exact specifications of the approved Design Intent Drawings.

J. Brightness of signs shall be even and consistent in intensity, coverage, and color both within signs and between signs of similar lighting technique and subject to approval by City. All aluminum cabinets to be free from light leaks.

K. All conduit, raceways, crossovers, wiring, ballast boxes, transformers, and other equipment necessary for sign connection shall be concealed. All bolts, fastenings and clips shall consist of enameling iron with porcelain enamel finish; stainless steel, anodized aluminum, brass or bronze; or carbon-bearing steel with painted finish. No black iron materials will be allowed.

L. Underwriter’s Laboratory-approved labels shall be affixed to all electrical fixtures. Fabrication and installation of electrical signs shall comply with all national and local building and electrical codes.

M. Location of all openings for conduit sleeves and support in sign panels and building walls shall be indicated by the Sign Contractor on drawings submitted to the City. Sign Contractor shall install same in accordance with the approved drawings.

N. In no case shall any manufacturer’s label be visible from normal viewing angles.

O. Sign permit stickers should be affixed so as not to be visible from the street.

P. All access panels shall be waterproof and concealed from public view. Panels shall be inset so that outer surface of panel aligns flush with outer surface of sign to which it is attached. Attachment shall be by means of counter sunk flat head screws (tamper proof where accessible to public). Paint finish screw heads to match surrounding color.

Q. Metal below grade or in contact with grade-level concrete shall be coated with coal tar epoxy.

R. All metal interior surfaces of internally illuminated sign cabinets to be painted white. -86-

FILE: -CONST SPECS BELLFLOWER 13 S. All pop rivets where indicated on engineer's drawings shall be submitted with flush rivets where visually exposed.

T. Where design of channel letters is such that the front-edge of the letter return or retainer is visible on the face of the letter, the front edge of the return or retainer shall be painted to match the color of the letter face. The letter return and return edge of retainer shall be the same color.

U. Where trim cap is used, paint trim cap to match color of letter return.

V. Signs with dimensions greater than 16' shall have a face retainer width of no more than 1" unless otherwise approved on the shop drawings.

W. Anti-graffiti coating to be applied to all signs accessible to the public. Specify brand of anti-graffiti coating and provide cut sheet along with Shop Drawings showing where protection is applied.

X. Openings in sign panels for pop-through letters / graphics must be of sufficient size to accommodate expansion and contraction of acrylic over a 120° F temperature range. Indicate tolerance dimensions on shop drawings.

Y. Sign Contractor shall construct signage in such a manner that illuminated forms and cabinets shall be free of lighting leaks.

Z. Provide ventilation for internally illuminated sign cabinets and monuments. Openings for ventilation must be louvered, baffled (no light leaks), screened and weather proof. Locate openings away from public view and show on Shop Drawings.

AA. Exterior display cases or cabinet signs must be weatherproof.

5.03 INSTALLATION:

A. Schedule:

All dates for sign installation must be approved in advance and coordinated with the City.

B. Location and Placement:

1. Letters shall be carefully spaced and accurately set in place, both vertically and horizontally, with overall inscription to conform with the Design Intent Drawings and approved templates and patterns.

2. Locations for each ground sign shall be staked by the Sign Contractor. Staked locations must be approved by the City or his designated representative prior to installation.

3. Sign installation shall be coordinated with other work on the site as outlined in Section 2, herein.

4. Unless other arrangements are agreed upon by the City or his representative, all sign locations must be marked and labeled on site with sign identification number for approval prior to installation.

5. All signs must be installed level, plumb and true in relationship to architecture, adjacent installations, and/or established reference points.

6. Installation shall be done in a manner to withstand all actions imposed by wind, water and other environmental forces.

C. Installation Conditions:

1. Working areas are to be left clean and orderly every day during the period of installation. All work is to be coordinated with the General Contractor and other trades working on the site.

2. In case of damage to landscaping material, irrigation lines, or other underground or aboveground equipment, the City and/or General Contractor shall be notified and the repairs shall be made to -87-

FILE: -CONST SPECS BELLFLOWER 14 his satisfaction. All damaged material shall be repaired and left in the same condition as it was found. All grades are to be restored to the original condition.

3. All installations are to comply with approved Shop Drawings.

D. Traffic Control:

1. Sign Contractor to prepare a Traffic Control Plan to City’s requirements, and shall furnish the City with the name and phone number of the individual responsible for the implementation and maintenance of traffic control.

2. Prior to the start of construction, the Sign Contractor is required to submit the traffic control plan for the project to the City Engineer for approval.

3. Any subsequent changes in the traffic control plan also require the approval of the City Engineer prior to the implementation of the proposed changes to traffic control.

5.04 ADJUSTMENTS AND REPAIRS:

The Sign Contractor shall repair, or remove and replace with new materials, all damaged units and units not complying with Contact Documents as approved by the Graphic Designer, at no additional cost to the City.

5.05 CLEANING:

Prior to final inspection and acceptance by the City, the Sign Contractor shall remove all protective coatings and stickers, clean metal and painted surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, and remove debris from the work site.

5.06 MAINTENANCE:

Prior to final payment, the Sign Contractor shall provide to the City written instructions for proper maintenance of all signs and signage elements. Instructions shall address periodic cleaning, service access, replacement procedures, and painting. Where applicable, color specifications shall also be provided.

-88-

SECTION 26 05 00

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 26 Sections, in addition to General Conditions and General Requirements.

1.02 WORK SEQUENCE, TEMPORARY POWER AND SUTDOWNS
A. Install work in to accommodate Representative's occupancy requirements. Coordinate electrical schedule and operations with Representative.

1.03 SPECIFICATION REFERENCES
A. References herein to specification section numbers and section titles outside of Divisions 26 may, or may not, match exactly. Use the section that most closely matches the reference. Some referenced specifications may be appear on the drawings rather than included in a separate specification book.

1.04 UTILITY COMPANY SERVICES
A. Contact the serving utility (SCE) prior to submission of bid to confirm utility service requirements.

B. Include in bid costs for trenching, conduit, hand-holes, manholes, excess cable charges, connection charges, and other requirements of the serving utilities.

C. Unless otherwise indicated in the General or Supplementary Conditions, the Contractor's bid is deemed to include costs related to utility services.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 30 days after award of contract, submit shop drawings, product data, studies and wiring diagrams. Do not install materials or equipment until written approval has been obtained from Architect.

1. Before submitting, check submittals to ascertain that materials and equipment meet all requirements of plans and specifications and conform to structural and space conditions.

Mark submittal sheets covering several types or sizes of equipment to indicate clearly specific equipment being proposed.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit electronically in PDF format.

1. Make shop drawings to scale, showing overall dimensions and other dimensions required for proper installation of equipment. Identify clearly each item on drawings to show piece of equipment it represents. Indicate corrosion resisting treatment and finish.

2. Provide drawings with title block identifying project name, specification section, responsible contractor, and name of preparer.

C. Product Data: Submit electronically in PDF format catalog cuts or manufacturers' data sheets.

For circuit breakers, include time current characteristic curves. For fuses, include minimum melting time/total clearing time characteristic curves. For panelboards, distribution panels, and distribution boards, show size, number of poles, trip rating of each circuit breaker, and circuit numbering system. For panelboards, show width of top, bottom, and side wire-ways, method of attaching circuit identification markers, characteristics of each type of circuit breaker, and details of circuit breaker locking device.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit electronically in PDF format. Schematic, line to line type, using standard symbols and with components arranged in logical sequence, so that system operation can be checked easily. Where special symbols are used or where function of components is not obvious, include suitable legend or functional guide. Number all terminals for external wiring connections on diagrams.

E. Make submittals sufficiently complete to show compliance with specified features and standards.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-1 -89-

F. Coordinated Installation Drawings: Show all equipment in affected space or room. Indicate required workspace. Show plan view and elevations.

G. Field Test Reports:

1. When specified in individual specification sections, submit 3 copies of field test reports for record purposes.

2. Indicate methods, procedures, and instruments used.

3. Identify deficiencies discovered and corrective action taken.

H. If approved in advance by Owner, electronic copies of submittals (in PDF format) may be used in lieu of or in addition to hard copy.

1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Provide in acceptable form, 2 bound copies of operating manuals. Include:

1. Where required in their respective technical sections for equipment and systems: Provide catalog cuts, functional description of operation, wiring diagrams, operating and maintenance instructions, parts lists and other data useful and necessary for complete maintenance and operation of equipment. For signal systems, also include system diagrams showing interconnections between various units, terminal markings at each unit, and schematic diagrams of each typical component, such as amplifier, power supply, tuner, etc.

2. Corrected copies of all submittals.

B. Deliver operating manuals to Architect prior to final acceptance.

1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.

Coordinate installation of work in available space with work specified in other Sections.

B. Propose rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement when requested by Architect/Engineer. Obtain permission of Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

1.08 PRODUCTS
A. Where manufacturer's model or series numbers are specified or shown, these indicate generally acceptable types required. Furnish products which comply with all requirements, as specified or shown.

B. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, provide units produced by a single manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)

END OF SECTION

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-2 -90-

SECTION 26 05 00.20

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES
A. NETA STD ATS – Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems, the most current edition applies.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit certification of testing agency qualifications.

B. Submit 4 copies of test report to Representative, Commissioning Agent, and to Contractor.

Include:

1. Summary of project.

2. Description of equipment tested.

3. Test results.

4. Conclusions and recommendations.

5. Appendix, including appropriate test forms.

6. Identification of test equipment used.

7. Signature of responsible testing agency authority.

8. Date and time of test.

9. Provide interpretation of test results.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Testing Agency: NETA STD ATS.

B. Test Instrument Calibration: NETA STD ATS.

C. Inspection and Test Procedures: NETA STD ATS.

1.04 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Notify Representative, Commissioning Agent, and Owner fourteen days prior to all tests.

B. Provide incidental labor, materials and facilities, including load banks where required.

1.05 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTION AND TESTING WORK
A. As specified in technical sections including, but not limited to:

1. Distribution Panelboards.

2. Cables: Low Voltage (600V Maximum).

3. Circuit Breakers: Larger than 90 Amp. Test at settings identified in approved system coordination study.

4. Instrument Transformers.

5. Metering and Instrumentation.

6. Grounding Systems.

1.06 SYSTEM TESTING
A. Submit system testing procedure/script for approval. Coordinate with Commissioning Agent

1.07 THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY
A. Provide a complete thermographic survey in accordance with NETA ATS.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
END OF SECTION 26 05 00.20

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-3 -91-

SECTION 26 05 19

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

2. Notify Representative of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding.

B. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual routing for underground circuits.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Representative and obtain direction before proceeding with work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required.

C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.

D. Manufactured wiring systems are not permitted.

2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation.

D. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.

E. Comply with NEMA WC 70.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-4 -92-

F. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL

83. G. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.

H. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 05 26.

I. Conductor Material:

1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.

2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.

J. Minimum Conductor Size:

1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.

2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.

K. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

L. Conductor Color Coding:

1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.

2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.

3. Color Code:
a. 240/120 V, 1 Phase, 3 Wire System:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Neutral/Grounded: White.
b. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.
c. For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code.

2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

B. Conductor Stranding:

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:
a. Size 12 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
b. Size 10 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

2. Control Circuits: Stranded.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

D. Insulation:

1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below, rated 90 degree C.
a. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2, 90 degree C.

2.04 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable.

B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 05 26.

C. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:

1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors or push-in wire connectors.

2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-5 -93-

D. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:

1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs.

2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.

3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.

4. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors where connectors are required.
a. Provide compression type, long barrel, double-hole, copper-type lugs (2 crimp minimum) for all power and grounding connections landed on bus.

5. Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals for all connections.

E. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.

F. Push-in Wire Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F.

G. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.

H. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration with inspection port.

I. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable for connection to be made.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Electrical Tape:

1. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.

C. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature. Yellow 77 is not permitted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

B. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Circuiting Requirements:

1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required.

3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-6 -94-

4. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are shown as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is permitted, under the following conditions:
a. Provide no more than 9 current-carrying conductors in a single raceway. Dedicated neutral conductors are considered current-carrying conductors. b. Increase size of conductors as required to account for ampacity derating. c. Size raceways, boxes, etc. to accommodate conductors.

5. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

D. Installation in Raceway:

1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants.

2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.

3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure.

4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.

1. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds permissible limits.

F. Install conductors with a minimum of 6 inches of slack at each outlet.

G. Where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others, provide a minimum of 5 feet of slack.

H. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures.

I. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.

J. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.

1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies.

2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors.

3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.

4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.

5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies..

K. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors.

1. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.

L. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-7 -95-

M. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

N. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.

END OF SECTION

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-8 -96-

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding and bonding system components.

B. Field quality control test reports.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system components and connections.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system.

C. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

D. Grounding System Resistance:

1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless otherwise approved by Representative. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.

2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 25 ohms to ground, when tested according to IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method.

E. Grounding Electrode System:

1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form grounding electrode system.
a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint. b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end with bonding jumper.

2. Concrete-Encased Electrode:
a. Provide connection to concrete-encased electrode consisting of not less than 20 feet of either steel reinforcing bars or bare copper conductor not smaller than 4 AWG embedded within concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70.

3. Ground Rod Electrode(s):
a. Provide single electrode unless otherwise indicated or required. b. Space electrodes not less than 10 feet from each other and any other ground electrode.
c. Where location is not indicated, locate electrode(s) at least 5 feet outside building perimeter foundation as near as possible to electrical service entrance; where possible, locate in softscape (uncovered) area.
d. Provide ground enhancement material around electrode where indicated. e. Provide ground access well for first connected electrode.

4. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding electrode system resistance.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-9 -97-

F. Service-Supplied System Grounding:

1. For each service disconnect, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral (grounded) service conductor to grounding electrode system. Unless otherwise indicated, make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in service disconnect enclosure.

2. For each service disconnect, provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral (grounded) bus to equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of service disconnect.

G. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:

1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70.

2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.

3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus.

2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:

1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.

B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 05 26:

1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions:
1) Use hard drawn copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth.
2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway).

C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:

1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections.

D. Ground Rod Electrodes:

1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.

2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel.

3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Where rod lengths of greater than 10 feet are indicated or otherwise required, sectionalized ground rods may be used.

E. Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Comply with Section 26 05 19.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-10 -98-

B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically.

Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or bury horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or install at 45 degree angle or bury horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70.

1. Outdoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with top of rod 6 inches below finished grade.

D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.

1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.

2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces.

3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.

E. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

C. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.

D. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION 26 05 26

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-11 -99-

SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and components to be installed.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for installation.

3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations.

4. Notify Representative of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents.

Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:

1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.

2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where applicable.

3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.

4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

5. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed.
a. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported.

1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.

2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type or unistrut strap type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.

D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports.

1. Comply with MFMA-4.

2. Channel Material:
a. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel.

3. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gauge, 0.1046 inch.

4. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-1/2 inch width by 7/8 inch height.

E. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications.

2. Concrete: Use expansion anchors.

3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-12 -100-

4. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs. Provide seismic straps for I-Beams.

5. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.

6. Wood: Use wood screws.

7. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.

8. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) for compliance with applicable building code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES) evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.

D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Representative, do not provide support from roof deck.

E. Equipment Support and Attachment:

1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required.

2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.

3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.

4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support.

F. Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 33.13.

G. Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 33.16.

H. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

I. Remove temporary supports.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.

B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.

END OF SECTION 26 05 29

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-13 -101-

SECTION 26 05 33.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC) 2015.

B. ANSI C80.6 - American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC) 2018.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015.

D. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT) 2013.

E. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC) 2017.

F. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable 2014.

G. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit 2018.

H. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit 2020.

I. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 2016.

J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

K. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed under other sections or by others.

3. Notify Representative of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents.

Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between outlet, junction and splicing points.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits and fittings.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and larger.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-14 -102-

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Underground:

1. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or rigid PVC conduit.

2. Exterior, Embedded Within Concrete: Use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or rigid PVC conduit where necessary at elbows and bends.

3. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from underground.

4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduitlarger than 3/4 inch trade size is provided, use PVC- coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.

D. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

E. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 05 26.

B. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.

C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.

2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.

3. Control Circuits: 3/4 inch ( 21 mm) trade size.

4. Underground, Exterior: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.

E. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

B. Fittings:

1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threadless steel compression fittings permitted.

2.04 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242.

B. Fittings:

1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-15 -103-

3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.05 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

B. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil.

C. Interior Coating: Urethane, minimum thickness of 2 mil.

D. PVC-Coated Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.

2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil.

5. Interior Coating: Urethane, minimum thickness of 2 mil.

E. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 15 mil.

2.06 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C.

B. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; material to match conduit.

2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil.

B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be installed.

C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed.

D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.

E. Duct Bank Spacers: Nonmetallic; designed for maintaining conduit/duct spacing for concrete encasement in open trench installation; suitable for the conduit/duct arrangement to be installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.

B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

D. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

E. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the manufacturer.

F. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.

G. Conduit Routing:

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-16 -104-

1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required.

3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.

4. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical.

5. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.

6. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends between pull points for power.

7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of two 90 degree bends between pull points for communication.

8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points.

9. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.

10. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect.

11. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.

12. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces.

13. In exterior locations, conduit shall terminate in bottom or sides of boxes (not the top).

H. Conduit Support:

1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit. a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide space between conduit and mounting surface.

3. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted conduits.

4. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.

5. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted.

6. Where conduit support intervals specified in NFPA 70 and NECA standards differ, comply with the most stringent requirements.

I. Connections and Terminations:

1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections.

2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.

3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.

4. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock rings with ground bushings for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.

5. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finished floor.

6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats for EMT conduits utilizing conductor size #4 AWG and larger to protect conductors.

7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity.

J. Penetrations:

1. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.

3. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.

4. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-17 -105-

K. Underground Installation:

1. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a. Underground, Exterior: 24 inches.
b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab.

2. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 05 53 along entire conduit length for service entrance where not concrete-encased.

L. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated to be concrete-encased, provide concrete with minimum concrete cover of 3 inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated.

M. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.

N. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

O. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

B. Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.

3.05 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors.

B. All spare underground conduits shall have compression type plugs installed.

END OF SECTION 26 05 33.13

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-18 -106-

SECTION 26 05 33.16

BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.

4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.

5. Notify Representative of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents.

Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for outlet and device boxes, junction and pull boxes, cabinets and enclosures, and underground boxes/enclosures.

1. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Include reports for load testing in accordance with SCTE 77 certified by a professional engineer or an independent testing agency upon request.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for pull boxes, cabinets and enclosures, and underground boxes/enclosures.

D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Representative's use in maintenance of project.

1. Keys for Lockable Enclosures: Two of each different key.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 BOXES
A. General Requirements:

1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.

3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate.

6. For sheet-steel boxes extensions must match. (Welded box needs welded extension; Stamped box needs stamped extension)
B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes:

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-19 -107-

1. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.

2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or exposed intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is used.

3. Use cast iron boxes in locations subject to damage.

4. Use cast aluminum boxes in locations not subject to damage.

5. Use cast aluminum boxes where aluminum rigid metal conduit is used.

6. Use nonmetallic boxes where exposed rigid PVC conduit is used.

7. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.

8. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.

9. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.

10. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish with threaded hubs.

11. Nonmetallic Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2, and list and label as complying with UL 514C.

12. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted.

13. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a. Wiring Devices (Other Than Communications Systems Outlets): 4 inch square by 1- 1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size.

C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A.

2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R, painted steel.

3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. b. Boxes 6 square feet and Larger: Provide sectionalized screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures.

4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes:
a. Provide lockable hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. b. Back Panels: Painted steel, removable.

5. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated.

D. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:

1. Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with legend indicating type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts.

2. Size: Minimum 11" by 17" or larger as required or indicated on the drawings.

3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 12 inches.

4. Provide logo on cover to indicate type of service.

5. Applications:
a. Sidewalks and Landscaped Areas Subject Only to Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77 Tier 8 load rating.
b. Parking Lots, in Areas Subject Only To Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77 Tier 15 load rating.
c. Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehicular traffic.

6. Polymer Concrete Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Comply with SCTE 77.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-20 -108-

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or permitted.

G. Box Locations:

1. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate.

2. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.

3. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 26 05 33.13.

H. Box Supports:

1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

I. Install boxes plumb and level.

J. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.

K. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:

1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches deep.

2. Flush-mount enclosures located in concrete or paved areas.

3. Mount enclosures located in landscaped areas with top at 1 inch above finished grade.

4. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover bolted in place.

L. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V.

M. Close unused box openings.

N. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use.

O. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

P. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-21 -109-

3.04 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION 26 05 33.16

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-22 -110-

SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Identification for Equipment:

1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components. In addition to the equipment tag/name, include information as follows:

2. Service Equipment:
a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means. b. For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service, or any combination of branch circuits, feeders, and services, use identification nameplate or means of identification acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service disconnecting means to identify all other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying that building or structure. Verify format and descriptions with authority having jurisdiction.

3. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the available fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring documentation by NFPA 70 including but not limited to the following.
a. Service equipment.

4. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.
a. Minimum Size: 3.5 by 5 inches.
b. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the word message "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do not operate controls or open covers without appropriate personal protection equipment; Failure to comply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA 70E for minimum PPE requirements" or approved equivalent.
c. Service Equipment: Include the following information in accordance with NFPA 70. 1) Nominal system voltage.
2) Available fault current.
3) Clearing time of service overcurrent protective device(s). 4) Date label applied.

5. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and other guarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V nominal or less with the word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized personnel only" or approved equivalent.

B. Identification for Conductors and Cables:

1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19.

2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.

3. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations:
a. At each source and load connection.
b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-23 -111-

c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the enclosure.

4. Use wire and cable markers to identify connected grounding electrode system components for grounding electrode conductors.

5. Use underground warning tape to identify direct buried cables.

C. Identification for Boxes:

1. Use identification labels to identify circuits enclosed.

2. All boxes shall be labeled inside the box and on the box exterior.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Identification Nameplates:

1. Materials:
a. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use.

2. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non- conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text. a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch when any dimension is greater than 4 inches.

3. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text.

4. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser- etched text.

5. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.

B. Identification Labels:

1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant.
a. Use only for indoor locations.

2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated.

C. Format for Equipment Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.

2. Legend:
a. Equipment designation or other approved description. b. Other information as indicated.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height:
a. System Designation: 1/2 inch.
b. Equipment Designation: 1/4 inch.
c. Other Information: 1/8 inch.
d. Exception: Provide minimum text height of 1 inch for equipment located more than 10 feet above floor or working platform.

5. Color:
a. Normal Power System: White text on black background.

D. Format for General Information and Operating Instructions:

1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.

2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe operation and maintenance.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 1/4 inch.

5. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions:

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-24 -112-

1) Provide white text on red background for general information or operational instructions for emergency systems.
2) Provide white text on red background for general information or operational instructions for fire alarm systems.

E. Format for Caution and Warning Messages:

1. Minimum Size: 2 inches by 4 inches.

2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe operation and maintenance.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 1/2 inch.

5. Color: Black text on yellow background unless otherwise indicated.

F. Format for Control Device Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.

2. Legend: Load controlled or other designation indicated.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.

5. Color: Black text on clear background.

2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS
A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.

B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties.

C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.

D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use handwritten text.

E. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.

F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.

2.04 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Materials: Use foil-backed detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Foil-backed Detectable Type Tape: 6 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 5 mil, unless otherwise required for proper detection.

C. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.

D. Color:

1. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background.

2. Tape for Buried Communication, Alarm, and Signal Lines: Black text on orange background.

2.05 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.

B. Warning Signs:

1. Materials:
a. Outdoor Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid aluminum signs.

2. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners.

3. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning Labels:

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-25 -113-

1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self- adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969.
a. Do not use labels designed to be completed using handwritten text.

2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer.

3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:

1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.

2. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access.

3. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.

4. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.

5. Boxes: Inside and Outside face of cover.

6. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.

C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.

D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.

1. Do not use adhesives on exterior surfaces except where substrate cannot be penetrated.

E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed.

F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade.

G. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper adhesion.

END OF SECTION 26 05 53

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-26 -114-

SECTION 26 21 00

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Service Point: The point of connection between the facilities of the serving utility and the premises wiring as defined in NFPA 70, and as designated by the Utility Company.

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. No later than two weeks following date of the Agreement, notify Utility Company of anticipated date of service.

B. Coordination:

1. Verify the following with Utility Company representative:
a. Utility Company requirements, including division of responsibility. b. Exact location and details of utility point of connection. c. Utility easement requirements.
d. Utility Company charges associated with providing service.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of other utilities or obstructions within the spaces dedicated for electrical service and associated equipment.

3. Coordinate arrangement of service entrance equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

4. Notify Representative of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents.

Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

C. Arrange for Utility Company to provide permanent electrical service. Prepare and submit documentation required by Utility Company.

D. Utility Company charges associated with providing permanent service to be paid by Owner.

E. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section to review service requirements and details with Utility Company representative.

F. Scheduling:

1. Arrange for inspections necessary to obtain Utility Company approval of installation.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Utility Company letter of availability for providing electrical service to project.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product. Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, outline and support point dimensions, finishes, weights, service condition requirements, and installed features.

C. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations and arrangement of Utility Company and service entrance equipment, metering provisions, required clearances, and proposed service routing.

D. Drawings prepared by Utility Company.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and installed service routing.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following:

1. IEEE C2 (National Electrical Safety Code).

2. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).

3. The requirements of the Utility Company.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Store products indoors in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent condensation (including outdoor rated products which are not weatherproof until completely

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-27 -115-

and properly installed). Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle products carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosure, and finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide new electrical service consisting of all required conduits, conductors, equipment, metering provisions, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for connection between Utility Company point of supply and service entrance equipment.

B. Electrical Service Characteristics: As indicated on drawings.

C. Utility Company: As indicated on drawings.

D. Division of Responsibility:

1. Pad-Mounted Utility Transformers:
a. Transformer Vaults and Pads: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements.
b. Transformers: Furnished and installed by Utility Company. c. Transformer Grounding Provisions: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements.
d. Transformer Protective Bollards: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements.
e. Primary:
1) Trenching and Backfilling: Provided by Utility Company. 2) Conduits: Provided by Utility Company.
3) Conductors: Furnished and installed by Utility Company. f. Secondary:
1) Trenching and Backfilling: Provided by Contractor.
2) Conduits: Furnished and installed by Contractor.
3) Conductors: Furnished and installed by Utility Company (Service Point at service entrance equipment).

2. Terminations at Service Point: Provided by Utility Company.

3. Metering Provisions:
a. Meter Bases: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements.
b. Metering Compartments in Service Entrance Equipment: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements.
c. Metering Transformers: Furnished and installed by Utility Company. d. Wiring Between Metering Transformers and Meters: Furnished and installed by Utility Company.
e. Communications Conduits for Meters: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements.

E. Products Furnished by Contractor: Comply with Utility Company requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that ratings and configurations of service entrance equipment are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Verify and mark locations of existing underground utilities.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-28 -116-

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Utility Company requirements.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.

D. Construct cast-in-place concrete pads for utility equipment in accordance with Utility Company requirements.

E. Provide required protective bollards in accordance with Utility Company requirements.

F. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

G. Provide grounding and bonding for service entrance equipment in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

H. Identify service entrance equipment, including main service disconnect(s) in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed equipment from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-29 -117-

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

2. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

3. Notify Representative of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents.

Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories.

1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device upon request.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.

1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of panelboards and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated.

2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.

C. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in NEMA PB 1 as routine tests.

D. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed circuiting arrangements.

G. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Representative's use in maintenance of project.

1. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA 407.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle .

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-30 -118-

B. Or equal.

2.02 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions:

1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.

2. Ambient Temperature:
a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

C. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

2. Listed series ratings are not acceptable.

D. Panelboards Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A.

E. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.

G. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.

1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection.

2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

I. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:
a. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed. b. Provide painted steel boxes for surface-mounted panelboards where indicated, finish to match fronts.

3. Fronts:
a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes. b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough opening.
c. Finish for Painted Steel Fronts: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated.

4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.

J. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.

2.03 LOAD CENTERS
A. Description: Circuit breaker type load centers listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Bussing:

1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices.

2. Bus Material: Copper.

C. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic plug-in type.

D. Enclosures:

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-31 -119-

1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

2. Fronts: Provide lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts.

3. Provide circuit directory label on inside of door or individual circuit labels adjacent to circuit breakers.

2.04 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

2. Interrupting Capacity:
a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than:
1) 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC. b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated.

3. Conductor Terminations:
a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.
b. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection.

5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.

6. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

7. Do not use handle ties in lieu of multi-pole circuit breakers.

8. Provide multi-pole circuit breakers for multi-wire branch circuits as required by NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install panelboards in accordance with NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.

D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

F. Install panelboards plumb.

G. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered.

H. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.

I. Mount floor-mounted power distribution panelboards on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed.

J. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-32 -120-

K. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.

L. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as required to complete installation.

M. Multi-Wire Branch Circuits: Group grounded and ungrounded conductors together in the panelboard as required by NFPA 70.

N. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as determined by overcurrent protective device coordination study performed according to Section 26 05 73.

O. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.

P. Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section

7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers. Tests listed as optional are not required.

C. Procure services of a qualified manufacturer's representative to observe installation and assist in inspection, testing, and adjusting. Include manufacturer's reports with field quality control submittals.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION 26 24 1

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
SPECIFICATIONS NO. 22/23-06
TP-33 -121-

129300 – SITE FURNISHINGS - 1
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 06/07/2022

BELLFLOWER, CA

SECTION 129300

SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services necessary to provide all concrete, complete in place, as shown on the drawings or specified herein.

B. Work included:

1. Bench.

C. Related work specified in other sections:

1. Planting - Section 329000.

2. Concrete Paving - Section 321313.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for acceptance manufacturer’s catalogue information or shop drawings indicating size, materials, finishes and quantities of items being supplied. Submit one sample for precast concrete products.

B. Submittals per Division 01 – ‘General Requirements’, Section 1D – ‘Special Conditions’.

C. Product Data: Submit certificates of compliance, manufacturer’s specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each product and other materials required by the manufacturer(s).

D. Certification: Submit notarized certification from applicator and manufacturer stating that the work has been installed to meet or exceed the specifications and manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations.

1.4 COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall notify all other Contractors, such as plumbers, electricians, etc., in ample time to install work including sleeves, before concrete is placed.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Division 1, Section: PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE REQUIREMENTS.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
-122-

129300 – SITE FURNISHINGS - 2
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 06/07/2022

BELLFLOWER, CA

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each site furnishing item from single source and from single manufacturer.

B. Subcontractor shall coordinate all inspections, and final acceptance through City.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Provide furnishings as specified and in locations as noted in the drawings.

A. Bench
Manufacturer: Dumor, Inc.
(800) 5987-4018

1. Bench shall be 58 Series Steel Bench (58-60 with center arm rest)

2. Color: Black

3. Finish: Baked-on Polyester Powder

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services necessary to install site furnishings as shown on the drawings or specified herein.

3.2 Work shall be set plumb level and true to line and shall present a neat and finished appearance. Include setting each item in its correct place, fastening it, connecting it, or incorporating it into other portions of the work, as each item may require; and testing and operating equipment to assure proper functioning.

3.3 The work of this Section shall include the furnishing of anchors and adhesives required for installing and attaching the equipment specified herein. All furnishings shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations unless noted in drawing or herein.

3.4 Adequately protect all work from damage by subsequent construction operations. Damaged work shall be replaced.

3.5 The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by his employees. Upon completion of work, rubbish and excess materials are to be removed from the site, leaving the areas acceptably clean.

END OF SECTION
-123-

321313 – CONCRETE PAVING - 1
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

SECTION 321313

CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide complete concrete paving and curbs as shown on Drawings and as specified herein. See Drawings, schedules and details for types and locations of concrete work required. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and supervision in accordance with these specifications and applicable Drawings.

B. Work Specified in This Section:

1. (Natural Grey) Concrete footings for site construction.

2. (Natural Grey) Concrete mow curbs.

C. Definition: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Landscape Architect or the Owner’s authorized representative.

1.2 COORDINATION
A. Fully coordinate work with all other trades involved. Coordinate with General Contractor items of other trades to be furnished and set in place. They shall execute portions of their work that is embedded, built in, attached to, or supported by the work of this section in ample time so that progress of the work is not delayed. Any cutting or patching made necessary to comply with this injunction shall be done at the General Contractor's expense.

General Contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation of all accessories embedded in the concrete and for the provision of holes, openings, etc., necessary to the execution of the work of other trades.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All concrete work shall be true to line and grade as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper drainage, without birdbaths, on all concrete paving surfaces. Any discrepancies or omissions on Drawings or conditions on the site that prevent the Contractor from providing proper drainage shall be brought to the attention of the Owner’s Representative in writing for correction or relief before work proceeds. All construction shall conform to current applicable codes and ordinances.

B. Piping: Do not embed piping, other than electrical conduit, in structural concrete. Locate conduit to maintain strength of structures to maximum. Verify size, length and location of electrical conduit. Sleeve any other piping.

C. Embedments: Anchor plates, inserts, and other items embedded in concrete shall be accurately secured so that they will not be displaced during placing of concrete.

1. Reactive metal embedments shall be sleeved or have a bituminous coating applied to the portions in contact with concrete. Applies to zinc, aluminum, steel (not stainless) and iron.
-124-

321313 – CONCRETE PAVING - 2
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

D. Surface Tolerances: Finished paving surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4 inch when measured with a 10-ft. metal straightedge, except at grade changes. No “birdbaths” or other surface irregularities will be permitted. Correct irregularities to the satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

E. Surface Friction Coefficient: All concrete shall have a slip-resistant surface with a minimum friction coefficient of 0.6. Pool areas shall have a coefficient of 0.8.

F. Testing

1. The Owner’s Representative will select a qualified testing laboratory to take samples for testing during the course of the work as considered necessary. The Owner’s Representative will pay for costs of such tests. Contractor shall cooperate in making tests and shall be responsible for notifying the designated laboratory in sufficient time to allow taking of sample at time of pour.

2. Refer to Division 1 for specific requirements of testing.

3. Should tests show that concrete is below specified strength; Contractor shall remove all such concrete as directed by Owner’s Representative. Full cost of removal of low- strength concrete, its replacement with concrete of proper specified strength, and testing shall be borne by Contractor.

4. The specifications and recommended practices of the American Concrete Institute (ACI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), The Uniform Building Code, and the Shaw US Patent #4,748,788, referred to in this specification with their individual designations are to be considered part of this specification. The latest revision of each recommended practice or specification shall apply.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT
A. Shall conform to current requirements of ASTM Designation C150, Type II cement with low alkaline.

B. Use same brand of cement from single source throughout entire project.

2.2 AGGREGATES
A. Coarse aggregate for concrete paving:

1. Shall be non-reactive aggregate. No Sun Valley aggregate shall be used. Contractor will submit a certificate stating that the aggregate has no history of reactivity and meets the ASTM standards

2. Coarse aggregate for regular-weight concrete shall be hard, curable, uncoated, washed, graded, cleaned, and screened crushed rock or gravel conforming to current requirements of ASTM Designation C33.

3. Coarse aggregate for paving shall not exceed 3/4 inch. -125-

321313 – CONCRETE PAVING - 3
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

4. Use same aggregate from single source throughout entire project.

B. Aggregate for exposed aggregate finish shall be 3/8” water-washed pea rock with smooth edges.

C. Fine aggregate:

1. Sand shall be clean, hard, and durable with uncoated grains

2. Free from injurious amounts of silt, loam, clay or other deleterious matter,

3. Conforming to ASTM Designation C33,

4. Graded in size from coarse to fine with 95-100% by weight passing a No. 4 sieve, 45-70% passing a No. 16 sieve, 15-30% passing a No. 50 sieve, and 3-8% passing a No. 100 sieve.

5. Use same sand from single source throughout entire project.

2.3 WATER
A. Provide clean, potable concrete mixing water free from injurious amounts of salts, oils, acids, alkalis, organic materials, or other deleterious matter.

2.4 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIALS
A. Pre-molded expansion joint filler shall conform to ASTM D1751-6B size per Drawings. “Ethafoam Polyfelt” by White Cap, Inc., "Denver” foam backer rod by DFC, "Sonofoam" backer rod by Sonneborn, or approved equivalent.

B. Joint sealant compound shall be polyurethane two-part as manufactured by Sikaflex, Sonneborn or approved equivalent. Color shall be per Drawings, or as approved by Owner’s Representative.

2.5 REINFORCING
A. Reinforcing bars shall conform to current requirements of ASTM Designation A615 deformed Grade 40 or Grade 60 billet-steel, clean and free from rust, scale, or coating that will reduce bonding.

B. Welded wire fabric shall conform to current requirements of ASTM Designation A185. Tags designating wire size and spacing shall be left on each roll until ready to use. Lap 6" on all edges.

C. Provide certified mill test reports regarding chemical and physical properties of all reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric furnished.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DESIGN OF MIXES AND PROPORTIONING
-126-

321313 – CONCRETE PAVING - 4
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

A. Ensure that batch plant guarantees single source supply for cement, fine aggregate, and coarse aggregate for entire length of project
B. Proportioning and mixing of cement, aggregate, admixture, and water to attain required plasticity and strength shall be in accordance with the current edition of the ACI Manual of Concrete Practice and the PCA "Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures”, and per ASTM C94.

C. Concrete mixtures shall be designed by an approved commercial testing laboratory, using approved materials furnished by the Contractor, to obtain the specified minimum compressive strengths of 3,250 psi at 28 days.

D. Any use of accelerants shall be limited to non-chloride accelerators.

E. Maximum slump shall be 4”
F. Maximum aggregate size shall be 1”
G. Cement type shall be Type V Portland
H. Minimum Cement Content shall be 5.5 sacks per cubic yard I. The water-cement ratio shall be a maximum of 0.5lb/lb of cement

3.2 FORM WORK
A. Forms shall be constructed accurately to dimensions and plumb and true to line and grade.

Forms shall be substantial, mortar tight, braced, and tied so as to maintain position and shape during placing of reinforcing and concrete. Way surfaces and bulged walls or slab surfaces resulting from settlement or springing of formwork will not be acceptable.

Concrete patterns shown with radiused perimeter in drawings shall be formed in smooth, consistent radius. A series of line segments, and/or irregularities in the radius will be unacceptable.

B. The Contractor shall carefully examine Drawings and provide all recesses and all openings of proper sizes or shapes required or as may be directed by Owner’s Representative for installation of all work requiring opening.

C. Forms shall be constructed and assembled in such a manner that construction joints shall occur at approved locations. Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned out before concrete is placed and forms shall be removed without damage to concrete.

D. Care shall be taken in all details of forming, setting, reinforcing, mixing, and placing all concrete exposed in finish work to obtain smooth, even surfaces of dense concrete, and clean sharp inside and outside corners, except where tooled corners are indicated.

Concrete will be free of voids and irregularities.

E. Earth forms may be used for footings only where soil is firm and stable and concrete will not be exposed. Excavations shall be cut neat and accurate to size, and all exposed concrete shall be formed with the form extending at least six inches below finish grade. -127-

321313 – CONCRETE PAVING - 5
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

F. Forms shall be carefully observed and checked for alignment and level as the work proceeds. All needed adjustment or additional bracing shall be done promptly.

G. After forms have been placed and approved, the Contractor shall see that all other trades have been properly notified and are given sufficient time to complete installation of their work. Placing of reinforcing steel shall proceed progressively with work of other trades and each shall arrange their working schedules so as to avoid disturbing or moving of work already installed by one trade to admit the work of another. Each trade shall be entirely responsible for proper installation and securing of the work and each shall keep his work under observation during placing of concrete.

H. Before pouring footings for foundations, see that bottoms of excavations are undisturbed earth free from water or frost, properly cleaned and leveled off, and compacted as required by the ACI building code. Do not place concrete on frozen earth or uncompacted fill.

I. Forms shall remain in place long enough to allow concrete to set properly and the Contractor shall assume all responsibility for removing forms. In no case shall supporting forms or shoring be removed until concrete has sufficient strength to safely carry its own weight and the load upon it. Supporting vertical surfaces shall stay in place for 2 days minimum.

3.3 BASE PREPARATION
A. Subgrades shall consist of moisture conditioned, compacted 95% min. to 12” depth, see soil engineer’s report. All subgrades shall be graded to plus or minus 0.05” B. Conform to all recommendations as noted in the soils engineer's report.

3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. Place all reinforcement as shown on Drawings. Accurately place and securely fasten and support reinforcement to prevent displacement before or during pouring. Hang footing bars from forms. Support wire mesh with suitable metal cradles.

B. Clean, bend, and place reinforcement in accordance with current requirements of ACI Manual of Concrete Practice.

C. Reinforcement Splices:

1. Welded wire fabric - One-mesh minimum

2. Reinforcing bars:
a. #3 through #7 = 30-bar diameter
b. #8 through #9 = 40-bar diameter
c. #10 through #11 = 54-bar diameter

3.5 FINISHES
-128-

321313 – CONCRETE PAVING - 6
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

A. Medium Broom Finish: After surface water disappears and floated surface is sufficiently hardened, steel trowel and re-trowel to smooth surface. When ready, apply approved coarse texture finish by sliding a wire or stiff bristle broom in one direction along a straightedge guide set at right angles to the direction of traffic.

3.6 JOINTS
A. Score joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete using a jointer to cut the groove so that a smooth uniform impression is obtained. All joints shall be struck before and after brooming.

B. Expansion Joints and Edging: Expansion joints shall be formed provided at the location and intervals as shown on the Drawings and at all locations where concrete paving abuts buildings or other permanent vertical structures. Approved joint material shall be placed with top edge 1/4 in. below the paved surface, and shall be formed in the fresh concrete using an edging tool to provide a smooth uniform impression. All edges shall be struck before and after brooming. After the curing period, expansion joints shall be carefully cleaned and filled with approved backer rod and joint compound flush with the paved surface in such a manner as to avoid spilling on paved surfaces or overflow from joint.

3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Protect concrete against frost, rapid drying, and rain damage, and keep moist for at least seven (7) days after placing. Protect concrete during this period by wet burlap, canvas covering, or liquid curing compound. Secure Owner’s Representative's approval of proposed methods. During this period maintain concrete above 70 F for at least three days or above 50 F for at least five days. Concrete from which forms are removed within seven (7) days after pouring shall be sprayed during the curing period as frequently as drying conditions may require. Concrete covering shall be a type that will not stain or discolor finished concrete surfaces. Cure concrete in accordance with requirements of the current ACI Manual of Concrete Practice.

B. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

C. Metal Form Ties: Metal form ties extending from the face of permanently exposed concrete shall be cut off at least one inch deep in the concrete immediately after removal of forms.

Fill holes with a 1:3 cement and sand mortar as dry as possible and finish flush with the adjacent surface.

D. Defects: All defects in concrete work shall be corrected. Voids shall be chipped to sound concrete and to a depth of at least one-inch with the edges perpendicular to the surface and parallel to form markings. Repairing voids and rubbing shall be done as directed by the Owner’s Representative, and shall be done at the Contractor's expense. Concrete surfaces so repaired shall duplicate the appearance of the unpatched work.

E. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.

Sweep concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

END OF SECTION
-129-

321513 – DECOMPOSED GRANITE PAVING - 1
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA
SECTION 321513

DECOMPOSED GRANITE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Section includes decomposed granite, and the following:

1. Sub-grade Preparation

2. Base Preparation

3. Stabilizer Application

4. Compaction

5. Cleanup

6. Edging
B. Definitions: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Landscape Architect or the Owner's authorized representative.

1.2 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit one-pint sample of the specified decomposed granite, with named source with telephone and address and color.

1.3 FIELD MOCK-UP
A. Construct at earliest possible time and at approved location before proceeding with the work.

1. Prepare one (1) 10 feet by width of path, paving mock-up, complete with base coarse-if required, edging, and compacted as specified. Include adjustments, approved by the Owner’s Representative from reviews of the mock-up process.

Coordinate work with conditions and material placement of other work and adjacent conditions.

2. The Mock-up shall be reviewed and approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to proceeding with the work. When necessary, remove and reconstruct the field sample until approved. Approved mock-up shall serve as the standard of acceptance for the paving work.

3. The approved mock-up may be incorporated into the final work. Demolish and remove non-approved mock-ups.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Bulk Material: Comply with Section 01600 for delivery and storage requirements.

B. Do not expose materials to excessive moisture or other conditions that would adversely affect their serviceability.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DECOMPOSED GRANITE:

A. Decomposed granite is referred to by the abbreviation (D.G.), or referred to as disintegrated granite. All decomposed granite for vehicular surfaces shall conform to the following grading requirements:

-130-

321513 – DECOMPOSED GRANITE PAVING - 2
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA
Sieve Designation % Passing Sieve Designation % Passing 3/8 inch 100 No. 30 40-50
No. 4 95-100 No. 50 25-35
No. 8 75-80 No. 100 20-25
No. 16 55-65 No. 200 5-15
B. The portion of D.G retained on the no. 4 sieve shall have a maximum percentage of wear of 50 at 500 revolutions as determined by AASHTO T96.

C. The portion passing a No. 40 sieve shall have a maximum liquid limit of 25 and maximum plasticity index of 7 as determined by AASHTO T89 and AASHTO T90, respectively.

D. D.G. to be used for pathways and non-vehicular areas may be ¼” minus sieve size.

E. Crushed aggregate screenings shall be free from clay lumps, vegetative matter and deleterious material.

F. See Drawings for D.G. color specification.

2.2 SOIL STABILIZER
A. Stabilizer shall be a non-toxic, colorless, odorless, organic powder that binds D.G. screenings. The stabilizer shall be as manufactured by Stabilizer Solutions Inc., (800) 336-2468, FAX: (602) 852-0718.

2.3 EDGING
A. Concrete curb: 6” x 6”, with #3 reinforcing bar - continuous, center in concrete curb (lap 12” at splices).

B. Jointing: Tool joints at +/-5’ O.C., install expansion joints at 20’ O.C.

C. Finish: Medium Broom

2.4 SOIL SEPARATOR
A. Geotextile filter fabric shall be a nonwoven geotextile composed of polypropylene fibers, formed into a stable network such that fibers retain their relative position.

B. Geotextile filter fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids.

C. Geotextile filter fabric shall be Mirafi #180N, as manufactured by Mirafi Construction Products, Inc. 365 South Holland Drive, Pendergrass, Georgia 30567, (706) 693-2226, www.tcmirafi.com/products/productnindex2.html or approved equal.

-131-

321513 – DECOMPOSED GRANITE PAVING - 3
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUBGRADE AND DECOMPOSED GRANITE PREPARATION AND COMPACTION A. Subgrade and base under all D.G. shall be prepared and compacted to 95% relative compaction.

B. Minimum compaction for D.G. surfaces shall be 95% relative compaction.

C. The finish grade shall be even between the headers with no humps or depressions after the compaction. The Contractor shall provide compaction tests as required by the Architect.

D. Treat compacted subgrade with pre-emergent herbicide, as recommended by certified pest control advisor.

E. Install soil separator over compacted subgrade prior to installation of decomposed granite mix.

3.2 SOIL STABILIZER AND DECOMPOSED GRANITE INSTALLATION A. Soil stabilizer shall be thoroughly blended with the D.G. screenings prior to installation.

1. The stabilizer shall be mixed at a rate of 12 Lbs. of Stabilizer product per ton of D.G. screenings.

2. Mixed stabilizer product in accordance with its manufacturer’s instruction.

3. Premixed Stabilizer and D.G. material can be obtained locally by contacting the stabilizer manufacturer and obtaining the location of a local vendor.

4. Not acceptable: drop spreading of the Stabilizer product over raked D.G. screenings and mixing stabilizer by rototilling.

B. Place the premixed stabilizer product on the desired subgrade in maximum 2” lifts. Rake smooth to the desired grade and cross slope.

C. After placement and raking, water the Stabilized D.G. to achieve full depth moisture penetration of the placed product. A one-hour rate of 20 gpm per 1,000 sq. ft. should achieve the proper full depth moisture penetration.

D. While the Stabilized D.G. is still thoroughly moist roll the material with a heavy lawn roller, approximately 1000 to 3000 pounds, and maximum 30” wide, to achieve finish grade and initial compaction. Utilize a hand tamp at edges, around benches, irrigation and sign posts. Do not use a wacker or vibratory roller to compact the Stabilized D.G.

1. Compacted finish surface of DG is to be level with adjacent paving, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Compacted finish surface of DG is to be one-inch above finish grade in adjacent planting areas, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Allow the finished surface sufficient time to dry prior to use.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EDGING
A. Concrete Curb: Install per plan and detail.
-132-

321513 – DECOMPOSED GRANITE PAVING - 4
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

3.4 CLEANUP
A. After all stabilization operations are completed, remove trash, excess materials, empty containers and rubbish from the property. All scars, ruts or other marks in the ground caused by this work shall be repaired and the ground left in a smooth condition throughout the site.

END OF SECTION

-133-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 1
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

SECTION 328000

LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS

The General Conditions and Special Conditions are a part of this section and the contract for this work and apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The scope of work includes the construction of an irrigation system for landscape planting areas. The extent of the irrigation system is shown on the drawings. The work includes all services, labor, materials, transportation and equipment necessary to perform the work as shown and/or noted on the drawings and/or as specified. Irrigation system shall be fully functional with all capabilities met.

B. Contractor is responsible for close coordination with other contractors involved with utilities, grading, drainage and construction of site elements. For the project to be successful, it is the responsibility of Contractor to coordinate his work with other trades, as well as with the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative prior to, and throughout the construction period to avoid conflicts which may interrupt another’s work progress.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Project Experience. Have a minimum of five (5) years experience installing three (3) different projects of this size including subterranean drip systems of similar scope. Provide project references.

B. Project Completion. Successful completion of a minimum of three (3) commercial irrigation projects of this size, from beginning to end (not including projects that may not have been originally bid upon from the project beginning). Must have good reputation for quality of work and the ability to stay on schedule.

C. Company Specialization. Professional contractor must have at a minimum, a C-27 license, is a Certified Irrigation Contractor (by the Irrigation Association) or equivalent certified Contractor with CLCA (California Landscape Contractors Association), specializing in commercial irrigation system installation and maintenance. A review of a current copy of each bidder’s license is required.

D. Credit Rating. Business has a good credit standing with irrigation distributors, manufacturers and other creditors that the business relies upon to perform.

E. Contractor shall be able to secure bonding.

F. Contractor shall be able to obtain and carry appropriate insurance policies.

-134-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 2
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

G. Installation Expertise. It is required for the Contractor’s performance that installers are experts in the operations they are engaged to perform.

H. Contractors shall provide evidence of valid training, certifications, safety training, and continuing education of employees by industry leading trade groups such as the IA and CLCA.

I. Company crew size and equipment shall be sufficient to accomplish the installation on schedule, and maintain the landscape according to maintenance specifications. The contractor shall own or have access to all of the equipment necessary to properly install the irrigation system.

J. Designation of site project leader or foreman shall not change for the duration of the installation.

K. Site project leader or foreman must be able to fluently speak English and understand English.

L. Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference. All contractors are required to participate in a Pre-Bid Meeting with the Landscape Architect and Owner’s Representative to discuss project scope, expectations, and timetables.

M. Bid Submittal. Must examine the bid to ensure it fully complies with all requirements of the construction documents. Bids not following the construction documents may be subject to rejection.

N. Water Management. The contractor must be sensitive to the realities of limited water supplies in this region, and that it is in an Emergency Drought Response stage. Contractor shall provide along with his bid, a signed acknowledgement in writing that the State’s landscape ordinance is in effect and will be adhered to at all times by his employees during installation and maintenance. Contractor shall provide a hard copy of the ordinance at the project site, and shall make it readily available to all his employees. Contractor and his employees shall know how to properly manage water that will provide the landscape with the health and appearance desired by the Owner, while minimizing the use of water.

1.5 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Section 329000 for “Landscape Planting”

1.6 REFERENCES

The latest editions of standards and specifications published by the following organizations, and referenced herein, apply to the work only to the extent specified by the reference.

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
C. United States General Services Administration (Federal Specification) D. Local Jurisdiction/s, Water Agency, State Agency, Local Health Department Regulations

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a complete list of all irrigation equipment to be used and to be handed over to the owner, manufacturer's brochures, maintenance manuals, warrantees and operating instructions, within ten (10) calendar days of notice to proceed. Provide a product submittal with index page clearly identifying the product name, manufacturer/model number, any options, and the page number where the product cut sheet is located in the submittal package. Clearly indicate product by circling, highlighting, etc. on cut sheet.

-135-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 3
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

1. If substitution of irrigation equipment from that which is specified on plans is proposed, Contractor shall provide in writing to the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative the proposed substitution for approval prior to any installation. Substitution shall be equal or better. Approval by Landscape Architect of any items, alternate or substitute indicates only that the product or products apparently meet the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications on the basis of the information or samples submitted. The Owner has the final decision on this matter.

B. Provide a copy of project as-builts and controller charts. Refer also to following section on details of submittal.

C. Provide a copy of major equipment maintenance and operation manuals.

D. Refer to extra irrigation equipment list indicated for irrigation materials to be provided to Owner prior to project turnover.

1.8 GUARANTEE

Furnish a guarantee in accordance with the General Provisions and Special Conditions for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance, at the conclusion of the maintenance period by the Contractor. The entire system shall be guaranteed against defective equipment, materials and workmanship. Repairs shall be made by the Contractor in a timely fashion at no expense to Owner. The guarantee shall include provisions for non-settling of the backfill in trenches and excavations which, if occur, shall be corrected, including repairs and/or replacement of any material damaged thereby or there from, to the complete satisfaction of, and at no cost to the Owner.

1.9 SITE OBSERVATION VISITS BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT

A. In all cases where site observation visits of the irrigation system work are required and/or where portions of the work are specified to be performed under the direction and/or site observation of the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative at least three (3) working days in advance of the time such site observations and/or directions are required (unless otherwise indicated).

1. Site observation will be required for the following parts of the work at the sole option of the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative. The Contractor shall request the presence of the Landscape Architect to observe the installation at the following stages of progress:

a. Upon installation and testing of main lines, lateral lines and driplines; when pipes are laid and are to be submitted to pressure tests. Do not cover any lines until they have been checked and approved.

b. Upon installation and testing of service and control systems, including any valves, filter(s), pressure regulator(s), quick couplers, backflow prevention devices, automatic controller(s), weather and rain sensor(s), flow meter(s), and control valves and wires.

c. When the irrigation system is completed, but prior to planting, the Contractor in the presence of the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative, shall perform a coverage test to determine if the coverage of water afforded the planting areas is complete and adequate. The Contractor shall prepare all systems including making -136-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 4
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

any adjustments prior to any coverage test and shall promptly furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct any inadequacies, without extra cost to the Owner.

d. Substantial completion walkthrough prior to the start of maintenance.

e. Final walkthrough two weeks prior to end of maintenance period.

f. A final site observation visit by the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative and performance test shall be at the same time as the final site observation of the specified landscape maintenance period work.

1.10 TESTING

A. All P.V.C. mains shall be subjected to a pressure test of existing line pressure for a period of four (4) hours and shall be watertight. All shut-off valves to isolate the section of mainline to be tested shall be fully closed prior to testing. All testing shall be in the presence of the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative unless otherwise authorized. Testing will be done in sections as required. Liquid filled test gauges rated to a minimum 200 psi with maximum 5 psi increments shall be used for testing purposes.

B. Test water mains as follows: (1) add water slowly to pipe to avoid water hammer damage, (2) bleed system at pressure gauge location to ensure all air is out of pipes, (3) pressurize system to line pressure for duration specified. Visually inspect for leaks while system is under constant pressure.

C. All lateral lines and driplines shall be visually observed for leaks under line pressure, prior to burial of lines. All piping sections in excess of 20 ft length occurring under pavement shall be reviewed for leaks prior to making connections to each end.

D. All installed irrigation control wiring shall be visually observed by the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative. Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing and passing a wire conductivity test for all remote control wiring not performed by a manufacturer’s field technician. Testing shall be repeated as required until facilities tested pass inspection and exhibit correct operation.

E. Authorization to proceed with installation shall be received prior to backfilling any trench. Do not cover any lines, sleeves, conduits, conductors, or fittings until they have been reviewed, and authorization to proceed is given by the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative.

1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Following construction, prior to the start of maintenance period, and prior to final acceptance of work, the Contractor shall provide a record set of drawings showing the irrigation system work. Utilize one complete set of irrigation drawing prints used for installing system, for indicating installed equipment. Make daily annotations thereon as project progresses, prior to burial of irrigation facilities. Lettering shall be 1/4" height minimum. Final submitted information shall be on a clean, full size set of bond copy prints for reproduction purposes. All items changed/relocated from original drawings shall be so indicated with the same symbol in the new location, the original symbol erased. All notes/callouts pertaining to the item shall be directed to new location. All work shall be neat, in red ink and subject to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect and/or Owner’s Representative. Once approved by the Landscape Architect and/or Owner’s Representative, obtain two (2) reduced print copies of record -137-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 5
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

drawings (11” X 17” format), laminate in plastic, and submit to Landscape Architect and/or Owner’s Representative. One (1) copy to go to Plaza owner, one (1) copy to go to Monument Sign Owner's representative.

B. Immediately upon the installation of any pipe or equipment, the Contractor shall indicate on the drawings the locations of said pipe or equipment. All locations of main line, and all conduits and sleeves shall be noted on plans with number, size and depth of cover at each location. Any detours around obstacles shall be noted with description of the obstacle and how the installation detoured, (for example, “shallow bury- 12” cover, or otherwise described for the occurrence).

C. Any changes in type/manufacturer/model number/size of equipment or installations from that shown on Drawings shall be so indicated on the Record Drawings. This includes irrigation legends, irrigation notes, irrigation details and any other information included in the construction of project.

D. All remote control valves shall be numbered by station and corresponding numbers shall be shown on the record drawings.

E. All routing of electrical wire shall be noted starting from the controller to each valve/valve manifold. Note any spare wires on wire runs.

F. All water mains, control wiring, stub-outs, points of connection to water mains, controllers, controller electrical circuit panel with circuit number indicated, pull boxes, wire splice boxes, sleeves, control wire conduit with routing, remote control valves, air/vacuum relief valves, lateral end flush valves, remote control valves and shut-off valves shall be located by measured dimensions, to the nearest one-half foot. Dimensions from two (2) different reference points minimum shall be given from permanent objects such as face of curbs, drain inlets, sidewalks, walls, structures and driveways. Use the nearest, best points of reference for documenting the dimensions for each item. Indicate lateral line routing to system where valve location and/or lateral line different than plans.

G. For the inside surface of the cover of each Automatic Controller, prepare and mount a color- coded chart showing the valves, mainline, and systems serviced by that particular Controller.

All valves shall be numbered to match the operation schedule and the drawings. Only those areas controlled by that Controller shall be shown. This chart shall be the as-built plan, entire or partial, showing building, walks, roads and walls. A photostatic print of this plan, reduced as necessary and legible in all details, shall be made to a size (11” X 17” size) that will fit into the Controller enclosure. This print shall be approved by the Landscape Architect and/or Owner’s Representative and shall be hermetically laminated by plastic. This shall then be placed inside the enclosure door, or in an agreed to location given by the owner.

H. Record drawings shall be signed and dated in black ink by the Contractor attesting to and certifying the accuracy of the record drawings. Contractor shall indicate company name, address and phone number on record drawings.

1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare and deliver to the Landscape Architect of Record within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction, two (2) 3 ring hard cover binders containing the following information:

1. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, list of equipment with name and addresses of local manufacturers' representatives. -138-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 6
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

2. Catalog and parts sheets on all material and equipment.

3. Equipment warranties and certificates.

4. Guarantee statement.

5. Complete operating and maintenance instruction for all major equipment.

B. In addition to the above mentioned maintenance manuals, provide the Owner‘s maintenance personnel with instructions for maintaining major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Landscape Architect and/or Owner’s Representative at the conclusion of the project that this has been rendered.

1.13 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Code requirements shall be those of State and Municipal Codes and Regulations locally governing this work, providing that any requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, not conflicting therewith, but exceeding the Code Requirements, shall govern unless written permission to the contrary is granted by the Landscape Architect and/or Owner’s Representative.

B. The Contractor is responsible for understanding the correct installation and operation of all equipment. If installation or operation is in doubt, contact manufacturer’s representative for instruction.

C. Extreme care shall be exercised at all times by the Contractor in excavating and working in the project area due to existing utilities. Contractor shall be fully responsible for expenses incurred in the repair of damages caused by his operation.

D. Care shall be used to avoid severing roots of existing trees. All trenching within 20' of trunk of existing trees to remain shall be done by hand methods, carefully tunneling under roots 2” and larger, and routing pipe to avoid disturbing roots.

E. If discrepancies are encountered between the plans and actual site conditions, or within the plans themselves, the Contractor shall promptly contact the Landscape Architect for direction.

F. For the purpose of clarity, plan locations of sprinklers, drip emitters, driplines, valves, in-line check valves, drip end flush valves, air/vacuum relief valves, splice boxes, existing facilities, pipe lines, sleeves and conduits, etc. are diagrammatic and indicate the spacing and relative locations of all installations. Final locations of installations shall be determined by final site conditions and plantings prior to their installation with the Landscape Architect and/or Owner’s Representative present.

G. All lines shall have a minimum horizontal and vertical clearance of 6" from each other and 6” from lines of other trades. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over one another. Install system so that repairs can be made without disturbing rest of system.

H. Prior to starting any work, Contractor shall obtain a reading of existing available water pressure (no flow condition) at the upstream side of the irrigation backflow preventer and promptly submit written verification of pressure with date and time of recording to the Landscape Architect and/or Owner’s Representative. Any differences to stated pressure on plans and readings may cause changes directed by the Landscape Architect and/or Owner’s Representative. Failure of Contractor to provide stated information as noted above will cause -139-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 7
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

the Contractor to bear full responsibility in cost, installation and equipment changes or additions for any changes necessary for a fully functional irrigation system with acceptable pressure for all site irrigation.

I. Point of connection shall be approximately as shown on drawings. Connect new underground piping and valves and provide all flanges, adapters or other necessary fittings for connection.

J. Permission to shut off any existing in-use water line must be obtained 48 hours in advance, in writing from the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative. The Contractor shall receive instructions from the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative as to the exact length of time of each shut-off.

K. Where occurs, new work will tie into existing facilities. Prior to starting any work, coordinate with the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative the exact tie-in locations and timing.

Verify their exact locations and suitability for this new work. Promptly report to the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative any obstacles to work.

L. Installation during the construction period may occur in stages depending on the site and concurrent construction activity. It is of utmost importance, and Contractor’s responsibility to preserve any water supply line’s service, and to keep interruption to the irrigation water supply to installed landscaped areas to a minimum. Contractor shall be responsible for providing continued watering of the site’s landscape during the entire construction period.

Contractor shall, with the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative’s prior written approval, utilize hose watering off building wall hydrants, highlining mainline, or whatever is deemed necessary to ensure watering is uninterrupted and plantings are maintained in a sustainable condition. Any cause for Contractor not preparing for, and not employing a watering program which results in plant decline or demise shall cause the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative to have the plants replaced by the Contractor at Contractor’s expense. The Landscape Architect and/or Owner’s Representative shall cause Contractor to replace plants during the construction period, along with a plant replacement guarantee.

M. Contractor shall acquaint himself with all site conditions and proposed site conditions as indicated on the plans and specifications, prior to any installation. Measure site planter areas and dimensions, and compare them to drawing area dimensions. Do not proceed with installation in any area until conflicts between these measurements have been brought to the immediate attention of Landscape Architect and/or Owner’s Representative, and resolved by and with the Landscape Architect and/or Owner’s Representative. Do not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that unknown obstructions, grade differences or grade discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engineering. Such differences shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Landscape Architect and/or Owner’s Representative. In the event this notification is not performed, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility and costs involved for any revisions necessary.

N. Where occurs, the Owner’s Representative is to coordinate with their landscape maintenance staff to help ensure that the landscape areas where water to existing areas will be disrupted is well watered in the days preceding the start of demolition and construction to provide plants with a bank of moisture.

O. All existing landscape plants and grades shall be protected in place insofar as possible. Do not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that conflicts exist that might not have been considered in engineering. Such differences -140-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 8
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner’s Representative for further direction. In the event this notification is not performed, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility and costs involved for any repairs or replacements necessary.

1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to Site Observation Visits Section for irrigation installation milestones and quality control measures.

B. Refer to Testing Section for Testing and review of installed equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS

Materials furnished under this specification shall be standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such materials, and shall be the manufacturers' latest standard design that complies with the specification requirements.

2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE

A. All plastic piping and sleeves shall be integral white color, Type 1, Grade 1 (impact modified) designated as Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), conforming to ASTM D1785, for potable water use.

B. PVC Plastic Pressure Lines: For piping upstream of remote control valves, shut-off valves and quick coupling valves. All piping 2" to 3” shall be Class 315 PVC 1120 (SDR 13.5). All piping 1-1/2" and smaller shall be Schedule 40 PVC. All above grade pipe shall be Schedule 40 UVR ultra-violet resistant pipe.

C. Plastic Non-Pressure Lines: For piping downstream of remote control valves. All pipes shall be PVC SCH 40.

D. Plastic Sleeves: Where required, sleeves for underground installation shall be PVC SCH 40, sized at a minimum twice the diameter of pipe to be sleeved, with a 2” minimum size. Each pipe shall have its own sleeve.

E. Identification: Furnish plastic pipe continuously and permanently marked with following information: Manufacturer's name or trade mark, size, schedule or class and type of pipe, working pressure rating at 73.4 degrees F., and National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) rating, and date of extrusion.

F. All plastic pipes shall conform to ASTM D2441.

2.3 FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS

A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe Fittings and Connections: Type I, Cell C1. 12454-B, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80, high impact molded fittings, manufactured from virgin compounds as specified for piping tapered socket or molded thread type, suitable for either solvent weld or screwed connections. Machine threaded fittings and plastic saddle and flange fittings are not acceptable. Furnish fittings permanently marked with following information: Nominal pipe size, type and schedule of material, and National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) seal of approval. PVC fitting shall conform to ASTM D2464 and D2466.

B. Copper pipe fittings and connections: Type K hard copper. -141-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 9
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

C. Brass Pipe Fittings and Connections: Standard 125 pound class 85% red brass fittings and connections, IPS threaded.

D. Flexible risers for drip irrigation shall be as noted on the drip details.

E. Polyvinyl Chloride Schedule 80 Risers and Nipples: Type 1, Grade 1, Schedule 80, high impact molded, manufactured from virgin compounds as specified for piping and conforming to ASTM D-2464. Threaded ends shall be molded threads only. Machined threads are not acceptable.

F. Swing joint assemblies for sprinklers shall be as indicated on the details, or approved equal.

G. PVC unions at valve assemblies shall be PVC SCH 80, molded and threaded inlet and outlet.

H. Dielectric bushings shall be used in any connections with piping of dissimilar metal materials.

2.4 SOLVENT CEMENTS, PRIMER AND THREAD LUBRICANT

A. Solvent cements shall comply with ASTM D2564. Socket joints shall be made per recommended procedures for joining PVC plastic pipe and fittings with PVC solvent cement by the pipe and fitting manufacturer and procedures outlined in the Appendix of ASTM D2564.

B. Primer shall be as recommended by pipe manufacturer of pipe used.

C. Thread lubricant shall be Teflon ribbon-type, or approved equal, suitable for threaded installations as per manufacturer's recommendations.

2.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY

A. Backflow preventer shall be as specified on the plans.

B. Wye strainer shall be a specified on the plans or approved equal.

2.6 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Controller and pedestal shall be as specified on the plans.

B. Rain sensor shall be a specified on the plans or approved equal.

2.7 AUTOMATIC CONTROL WIRE AND WIRE SPLICE CONNECTORS

A. Control wiring runs to the automatic control valves shall be single, solid 14 AWG copper wire in a polyethylene jacket, Style DB (Direct Burial) or equal. Common wire shall be white, control wires of different color than white, and match color of existing wire for replacing existing site wire.

B. Tracer wire for mainline shall be single, solid 12 AWG copper wire in a polyethylene jacket, Style DB (Direct Burial) or equal.

C. Wire Splice Connectors for valve control wires shall be 3M Scotchcast #3570G-N, as manufactured by the controller manufacturer, or approved equal. -142-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 10
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

2.8 WIRE CONDUIT

A. Wire conduit shall be electrical designation, gray, PVC SCH 40, with sweeps as required.

B. Wire shall be installed in conduit where passing under hardscape and through walls, sized twice the diameter of wire bundle, with a minimum 2” size.

2.9 CONTROL VALVES

A. Remote control valves shall be Rain Bird of model numbers as specified in the irrigation legend, or approved equal.

2.10 VALVE BOXES

A. All valve boxes shall be commercial grade, professional irrigation type, integral green colored, with locking bolt-down green lids, by Carson-Brooks, Ametek, or approved equal. Include stainless steel bolt and stainless steel washer for each valve box.

B. For drip remote control valve assembly: 15" x 21" nom. jumbo size plastic valve box.

C. For ball valve 1-1/2” and smaller: 10" diameter round plastic box. For ball valve 2” and larger:
10" x 19" nom. plastic valve box.

D. For drip flush assembly: 10" diameter round plastic valve box.

E. For drip air vacuum relief valve assembly: 10" diameter round plastic valve box.

F. For wire splice box, pull box and spare wire box: 10" diameter round plastic box.

G. Valve box extensions shall be of the same manufacturer, size and color as existing valve box to be adjusted to finish grade, unless when fully buried below finish grade.

2.11 BALL VALVES

A. Ball valves for mainline isolation shall be as indicated in the irrigation legend, or approved equal.

B. Ball valves for valve manifold isolation shall be as indicated in the irrigation legend, or approved equal.

2.12 LOW VOLUME IRRIGATION SYSTEMS

A. Remote control valve assembly. Low volume remote control valve assemblies shall be with valve, screen filter and preset pressure regulator. The valve assemblies shall be of the sizes and types listed in the irrigation legend, or approved equal. Note which valves on the plans are low flow and medium flow; assemblies to be sized accordingly.

B. Screen Filter. Screen filter shall have a Y-pattern body constructed of glass reinforced plastic with a specified mesh stainless steel filter screen and vinyl frame and shall be the size and type specified in the irrigation legend, or approved equal.

C. Lateral line end flush. Lateral line end flush shall be of the size and types in the assembly specified on the details, or approved equal.
-143-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 11
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

D. Air/vacuum relief valve. Air/vacuum relief valve shall be the size and type specified in the irrigation legend, or approved equal.

E. The drip line with integral emitters shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch linear low density polyethylene tubing, housing turbulent flow, integral 0.6 gallon per hour drip emitters impregnated with an herbicide. Drip line shall be of type as noted in the legend.

F. Drip supply tubing shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch black linear low density polyethylene tubing of same manufacturer as drip line with integral emitters.

2.13 DRIP TUBING CONNECTIONS, FITTINGS, AND ACCESSORIES

A. All fittings, connections, and adapters used shall be compatible with tubing used, barbed tubing connections, as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. 1/2" tubing fittings, adapters and connections shall be type as specified in the details.

C. Tubing stakes. 6” long, Pepco PS8-100, Toro TlS6, or approved equivalent.

D. Drip flexible risers shall be as noted in the drip details.

2.14 TRENCH MARKER TAPE

A. Water warning marker tape for pressure irrigation lines shall be 3” wide, detectable type, blue text with “Caution Irrigation Line Buried Below” (TA-DT-3B-I), manufactured by T. Christy Enterprises, Inc., Paul Potter Warning Tape Inc., or approved equal. Recycled water designated tape shall be used for recycled water irrigation systems.

B. Warning marker tape for control wire and control system conduits shall be 3” wide, detectable type, red text with “Caution Electric Line Buried Below” (TA-DT-3R-E), manufactured by T.

Christy Enterprises, Inc., Paul Potter Warning Tape Inc., or approved equal.

2.15 FILTER FABRIC

A. Filter fabric for all valve boxes shall be non-woven type, fully stabilized UV-resistant and shall prevent soil particles from clogging and entering valve box pits. Mirafi 140N or approved equivalent.

2.16 GRAVEL

A. Clean rock gravel free from organic material, clay or loam; ½ inch to ¾ inch in size.

2.17 EXTRA EQUIPMENT

A. Contractor shall provide to Owner:

1. One hundred feet (100‘) of dripline of the type installed on this project.

2. Twenty-five (25) dripline stakes of the type used on the project.

3. Five (5) of each type of dripline fitting of the type used on the project. -144-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 12
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

4. One (1) valve box and matching lid, each with locking bolt of each type installed on project.

5. Two (2) hand ratchet wrenches with sockets to match size of locking bolts installed on valve boxes (two different sizes typical).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Locations on drawings are diagrammatic and approximate only and shall be changed and adjusted as necessary and as directed to meet existing conditions and obtain complete water coverage. Locate and stake all work and obtain approval of the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative prior to any installations. This includes, but is not limited to valve locations, mainline locations and sleeve locations. Large plants take precedence over location of irrigation system equipment and lines (to be installed before dripline or other irrigation system components installed). Shrub placement shall be considered also prior to layout of the dripline and other irrigation system types.

B. Install and extend system indicated on the drawings, and as necessary to carry out the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor shall not willfully install any equipment as shown on plans when it is obvious in the field that conditions exist that were not evident at the time these plans were prepared. Any such conditions shall be brought to the prompt attention of the Landscape Architect and/or Owner prior to any work, or the Contractor shall assume all responsibility for any field changes deemed necessary by the Owner.

C. The Contractor shall obtain permits and call for inspections as required by local codes and regulations.

D. The system is designed for the minimum operating pressure and peak demand as shown at each point of connection, and for operation pressure as noted for equipment in the irrigation legend. The Contractor shall verify the available water pressure at the site prior to the start of installation and provide written documentation to the Landscape Architect of the recorded pressure.

E. 120 volt electrical power source is to be provided by the Electrical Contractor to the location for the automatic controller. Contractor shall be responsible for final connection to equipment and to the irrigation controller where required.

F. Locate existing potable water lines and control wires for connection thereto, controller/s, valves, and other underground utilities prior to digging trenches.

G. Paving, curb, drainage system, and tree and/or specimen plantings shall be installed or indicated prior to installation of irrigation system mains, laterals, driplines, sprinkler heads, and valve or pull boxes.

H. All piping, whether existing installation or new, shall be kept free from contaminants that may potentially enter piping during construction and following construction. Should Contractor’s work cause contamination in the irrigation water and it exhibit itself during construction and/or the maintenance period, Contractor shall be responsible to decontaminate the entire irrigation system’s components affected by contamination by flushing the debris out until water appears clear at the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative, at -145-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 13
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

Contractor’s expense. Components include, but are not limited to the following: mainlines, valves, sprinkler swing joints, sprinklers and nozzles. Contractor shall replace components where attempts at cleaning them prove unsuccessful. All work to decontaminate system and put it back into satisfactory working order shall be completed within 48 hours of the time condition is found and/or at the time of notification by the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative. Work shall be done to the complete satisfaction of the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative.

I. All existing wires and cables/conduits and mainlines shall be reconnected together where damaged/disrupted by construction in order to have a fully functioning irrigation system, with all system capabilities met.

J. Contractor shall employ whatever means necessary to protect valves, conduits, lateral lines and mainlines installed, especially when working with other trades. Stake out facilities; use flat, sturdy material to cover shallow buried piping as required throughout the construction period to minimize damage to the installation and to help deter bodily injury. Employ removable barriers as required to keep activity outside of construction areas.

K. Ponding/runoff from irrigation system shall be kept to a minimum wherever possible.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF IRRIGATION SYSTEM

Excavation and backfilling of Trenches

A. Excavate trenches, prepare subgrade and backfill to line and grade with sufficient room for pipe fittings, testing and inspecting operations. Do not backfill until the pipe system has been subjected to a hydrostatic test as specified. Do not cover any installed control wiring until it has been visually observed by the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative. Control wire shall be installed along with Pressure Line. Where not installed with Pressure Line (home run to controller, for example), install at same depth specified for Pressure Line.

B. Depth of Cover

In Landscape: (from Soil Finish Grade to Top of Pipe, Conduit or Tubing) PVC Pressure Line (2-1/2” & smaller) 18" min.

PVC Pressure Line (3” & larger) 24" min.

PVC Non-Pressure Line with 4” to 6” Pop-Ups or Bubblers 12" min.

PVC Non-Pressure Line with 12” Pop-Ups 18" min.

Subterranean Dripline Tubing 4”
Conduit See detail

C. Depth of Cover
Under Pavement: (from Base Material to Top of Pipe or Conduit) PVC Pressure Line (2-1/2” & smaller) 24" min.

PVC Pressure Line (3” & larger) 36" min.

PVC Non-Pressure Line 18" min.

Conduit See detail

D. Soil backfill within 3" of piping shall be free of all rocks over 1/2" diameter, debris, and litter prior to use as backfill. The remaining soil backfill shall be free of 1” and larger rock, debris and litter prior to using as backfill.

-146-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 14
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

E. Deposit topsoil on one side of trench and subsoil on the opposite side, then install irrigation lines and test each section.

F. Repair any leaks and replace all defective pipe or fittings until lines meet test requirements.

Do not cover any lines until they have been checked and approved for tightness, quality of workmanship and materials.

G. Backfill trenches, after approval of piping, with suitable and approved material, tamping soil around pipe and thoroughly compact all trench fills until 90% relative compaction has been achieved.

H. Backfill material shall be an approved soil, or sand where specified, free from rocks and clods, litter and other debris.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE

A. Because of the nature of plastic pipe and fittings, exercise caution in handling, loading and storing, to avoid damage.

B. The pipe and fittings shall be stored under cover until using, and shall be transported in a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the length of pipe to lay flat so as not to be subjected to undue bending or concentrated external load at any point.

C. All pipe that has been dented or damaged shall be discarded unless such dent or damaged section is cut out and pipe rejoined with a coupling.

D. Trench depth shall be as specified above from the finish grade to the top of the pipe. The bottom of the trench shall be free of rocks, clods, and other sharp-edged objects.

E. Pipe ends and fittings shall be wiped with "MEK" primer, or approved equal, prior to applying welding solvent. Welded joints shall be given a minimum of 15 minutes to set prior to moving or handling. All field cuts shall be beveled to remove burrs and excess material prior to fitting and gluing together.

F. Pipe shall be snaked from side-to-side of trench bottom to allow for expansion and contraction.

G. Center load pipe at 10' intervals with small amount of backfill to prevent arching and slipping under pressure. Leave joints exposed for site observation during testing.

H. No water shall be permitted in the pipe until a period of at least 24 hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing.

I. Plastic to metal joints shall be made with metal threaded couplings with PVC SCH 80 male adapters hand tightened, plus one turn with a strap wrench.

J. Plastic to plastic joints shall be solvent-weld, assembled per pipe manufacturer's specifications and using solvent recommended by pipe manufacturer only.

K. All pressure pipe shall have a continuous blue colored metallic three (3) inch wide marker tape placed nine (9) inches below finished grade directly above the buried pipe, or as detailed on the drawings.

-147-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 15
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SLEEVES AND CONDUIT

A. Wiring passing under proposed paving, walls or structures shall pass through SCH 40 PVC conduit-size as required (minimum of twice the diameter of wire/bundle).

B. Sleeves and conduits shall extend twelve inches (12”) beyond farthest edge of pavement, wall or structure on each end of sleeve. A 10 diameter round valve box shall be located at each end of sleeve, a maximum of two feet from edge of paving to note where sleeve occurs.

C. Provide removable plug at ends of conduits and sleeves to prevent debris entry prior to use.

No cloth or cloth Duct tape shall be used. Dry-fitted PVC cap recommended.

D. Refer to specific plan notes and details for installation. Exercise extreme caution when working near drainage system lines, structures and walls. Ensure these facilities have been staked out prior to any installation.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY
A. Install the backflow prevention assembly at approximate location shown on the irrigation plans and as per detail, and as required by local water district.

B. Install wye strainer as specified on the plans.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF DRIP AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE ASSEMBLY

A. Install the air/vacuum relief valve at approximate locations as shown on the irrigation plans and as per detail, at the highest elevation on each system. Where at all possible, find the most ideal location for maintenance purposes. Do not install where susceptible to damage from vehicles.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF DRIP FLUSH VALVE ASSEMBLY

A. Install the end flush valve at approximate locations shown on the irrigation plans and details.

Find the most ideal location for maintenance purposes. Do not install in a location where drainage from the valve could occur and cause ponding and runoff onto non-pervious surfaces, or where susceptible to damage from vehicles.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF DRIP SYSTEM

A. Hard PVC pipe laterals with fittings and risers, remote control valves, drip filters, ball valves and pressure regulators shall first be installed. Next, contractor shall flush out system thoroughly. Following flushing, contractor shall install all supply tubing and end flush caps/valves, and flush the lines once more. Any single-exit drip emitters shall then be installed. Flush again.

B. Lay rolled out tubing in flat area to encourage tubing to relax from its stored form. Distribution tubing shall be cut into lengths that will allow tubing to lay in a relaxed manner from connection to connection as shown in the detail drawings. Tubing shall be given a generous amount of slack to allow for some movement. Use stakes as required to secure tubing.

Provide consistent 4” cover over tubing.

-148-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 16
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

C. Special precautions

1. Distance from edges: allow not more than 6 inches from the edges, particularly if it is the top edge of a slope. Edges tend to dry more easily than the center. Remember that at the bottom of a slope the distance from the edges may be larger. (see also plans).

2. Be aware of high points and siphoning: a potential problem with buried drip lines is siphoning dirt in when the system is switched off. For this reason:
a. Drip lines should have a fairly constant slope.
b. A vacuum relief valve should be provided at the highest point in each sector. c. Drip lines should be connected at the end to a common flush line with a flush valve/vacuum breaker.

3. Be aware of excessive level differences: level differences between drip lines belonging to the same valve should not exceed 6 to 8 feet.

4. Slopes: the steeper the slope, the better the horizontal movement of water in the soil.

For this reason concentrate the density of the drip lines towards the top of the slope. At the bottom of the long gentle slope, the distance of the last dripper line from the edge should be as noted on plans, as water moves down due to gravity.

5. Positioning of air/vacuum relief valves: ensure that these valves are at a point high enough to prevent the system from draining through these valves when the water pressure is switched off.

D. System installation guidelines

1. It is recommended that all areas to receive subsurface irrigation shall be first excavated to a level 5 inches below proposed level of finish grade.

2. Prepare the topsoil/backfill at adjacent location to planting area to get the best water saving results with the system. For new installations, it is recommended to follow the preparation procedures described above under "special precautions". Remember that excavation and grading should have been finished before installation of the subsurface drip system.

3. Be sure you have everything required for the installation before opening trenches. Do a dry runoff assembling without gluing the system parts on top of the ground first. Pre assemble as many sets of components as practical above ground and in a convertible place. It is much easier to work above ground, so get as much work done as practical.

Adapters should be glued or threaded to PVC tees/ells.

4. Always condition soil moisture the day before opening trenches or installing drip lines.

Remember it is much easier to install the system in moist soil.

5. Install the system head first. Remote control valve, filters, pressure regulator and ball valve. Then install the PVC lateral lines.

6. Flush the lateral line outside the planter if practical. Connect to drip lines. -149-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 17
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

7. Distribute drip lines uniformly and as plans specify. Tubing stakes shall be installed on the tubing at the spacing of one per loop, or one every 10 linear feet. Contractor shall also mound small amounts of backfill over tubing at intervals to set tubing.

a. Select the tentative distance between drip lines. (say d inches)

b. Measure the exact dimension of the area to be covered leaving 6 inches for the edges. (say l inches)

c. See how many spacings can actually be left. (l/d approximated to the nearest integer, say n)

d. Recalculate what the new revised distance between drip lines should be to divide the space evenly.

e. Stake where the beginning and flush end of each drip line will go.

8. Tubing installation: leave enough length at the beginning and end for connections. It is convenient to finish the last foot of the installation or trench by hand. This gives more room for connections. Beware of bending the drip tubing too tight during installation. Do not bend tubing below a 24 inch radius because the pipe may kink, reducing the flow.

Use compression type elbows and fittings whenever required. Use large bucket for forming bends or for spacing lines as required to maintain uniform line spacing. Install tubing stakes at a 5 foot maximum spacing along each tube, more as required on curving sections.

9. The systems shall be left open and tubing and emitters left uncovered for testing purposes by the landscape architect. After successful testing of systems, cover system with prepared backfill previously set aside. Cover tubing early in the morning when temperatures are low to avoid tubing stress.

10. Warning: drip line is temperature sensitive. The protective life of the system will be reduced if the drip line outside is exposed to the sun for a long period of time. Store the drip line in a cool shaded place until installed.

3.9 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Direct burial control wire sizes shall be as shown and as specified hereinbefore.

B. All remote control valve wire shall be run up and looped with two feet of wire into each valve manifold along the mainline run.

3.10 REMOTE CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Direct burial control wire sizes shall be as shown and as specified hereinbefore.

B. All remote control valve wire shall be run up and looped with two feet of wire into each valve manifold along the mainline run.

C. Provide one control wire and one common ground wire to service each valve in system.

Provide 4' minimum expansion loop at each valve to permit removal and maintenance of

-150-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 18
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

valves. Provide 2’ minimum expansion loops at least every 100’ of wire length on wire runs greater than 100’. Form expansion loops by wrapping multiple turns of wire around a 1-inch diameter PVC pipe then withdrawing the pipe.

D. Install control wires at least 18" below finish grade and minimum of 4" from any pipe or fittings except at terminal points.

E. Install control wires and irrigation pressure piping in common trenches wherever possible. If not possible with pressure piping, then install with lateral lines. If in neither case, enclose wire in conduit.

F. As a part of the work to allow for possible damage to any conventional wired system common or control wire, the Contractor shall run an extra common (white color jacket) and control wire (red color jacket) on each leg of mainline from the controller to the furthest remote control valve on a mainline run. Where indicated on plans provide any additional number of spare wires indicated. Provide and install waterproof wire splice connectors and/or apply waterproof epoxy to the bare wire ends of spare wires.

G. Install Trench Marker tape on all installed wire.

H. Wire splices shall be made with waterproof connectors as specified.

I. Conventional wire splices shall be allowed only on runs of more than 500-feet.

J. Wire splices shall be done according to manufacturer's instructions and placed in a valve box as specified in previous section.

K. Conventional wire system numbering and tagging: Identify direct burial control wires at each automatic valve and at the terminal strips of the controller with corresponding valve station numbers shown on the drawings. Tag wires at the terminal strips with 3M Scotchcode SER Wire Markers or approved equal.

L. All valves, including master valves, shall have wires identified by controller and station designation inside each valve box with Christy Enterprises Standard Yellow I.D. Tags or approved equal. Identify spare wires by capping ends with waterproof connectors as specified above and tagging with an I.D. tag marked "SP".

3.11 REMOTE CONTROL VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install remote control valves in locations approximately as shown on the drawings, with sufficient distance from top of flow control stem to valve box lid. Install a union type connection. Affix valve ID tag to valve with nylon zip strap. Fit with plastic valve box and cover as shown in the detail drawings. Install one valve per box. Do not locate in paving or adjacent to where susceptible to vehicular damage. See also valve box installation.

B. Provide specified waterproof connections at all below grade wire splices and at every spare wire end.

3.12 VALVE BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install valve boxes as shown in the detail drawings. Install no more than one valve per box.

Set valve boxes perpendicular and plumb to adjacent hardscape and to each other. Set boxes 12” apart, and 12” from adjacent hardscape areas. Heat brand valve number and controller letter on outside top of valve box lid to maximum 1/8” depth with 1-1/2” minimum to -151-

328000 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - 19
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

2” maximum height text, readable from side valve would be accessed. Size shall be consistent throughout the project.

B. Heat brand outside top of valve box with branding of the identification of contents inside valve box. Brand lids using the following: (NOT ALL INCLUSIVE)

1. Pull box: PB

2. Wire splice box: WS

3. Spare wire: SW

4. Air/Pressure relief valve: APR

5. Drip Air/Vacuum relief valve: AVR

6. Drip flush valve: FV

7. Sleeve: SL

8. Ball valve: BV

C. Valve boxes shall not be modified in any way by cutting away portions of them, to ensure structural integrity. Any removal of valve box material will be subject to rejection and replacement, unless such removal is granted by the Landscape Architect and/or Owner’s Representative, but only under consideration prior to valve box installation.

3.13 BALL VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install all ball valves approximately where shown on drawings and as shown on the detail drawings. Install one valve per box. Do not locate in paving.

3.14 CLEAN-UP

A. As project progresses, Contractor shall daily maintain all areas in a neat manner and remove unsightly debris as necessary. After completion of project, Contractor shall remove all debris and containers used in accomplishing work. Contractor shall sweep and clean all sidewalks, asphalt, and concrete areas, and clean all vertical surfaces affected by Contractor’s work, to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative.

3.15 WATERING GUIDELINES

A. The Contractor shall monitor the planting areas and new plants closely and frequently during the maintenance period for adequate levels of soil moisture; so that over- and under-watering situations can be corrected.

B. Watering shall occur according to site conditions, local conditions and water restrictions to keep the plantings sustained and healthy. Adjustments to watering intervals and durations shall be as required with weather changes and establishment of the plants.

C. Do not depend solely on the automatic irrigation system. Utilize hose watering for the trees through the plant establishment period. Utilize hose watering for other plantings as required.

D. Care shall be taken that the rate of application of water does not cause ponding or runoff onto non-pervious surfaces.

E. All depressions, voids and settled trenches generated by watering shall be filled with amended topsoil and brought up to finish grade. Restore planting as required to match adjacent areas.

END OF SECTION
-152-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 1
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

SECTION 329000

LANDSCAPE PLANTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes (not all inclusive)

1. Plants.

2. Planting soils, soil amendments, and fertilize

3. Bark mulch.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work includes all labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services necessary for, and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery, and installation of "landscaping," complete as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 328400 for “Landscape Irrigation”

1.5 DEFINITIONS:

A. Architect: The Landscape Architect or the Owner's authorized representative.

B. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

C. Bonded Fiber Matrix: A continuous layer of elongated fiber strands held together by a water-resistant bonding agent.

D. Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape at a height of 12 inches (300 mm) above the ground.

E. Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of organic material that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and stabilized to the point that it is beneficial to plant growth.

F. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

G. Final Acceptance: Observation review by Architect at end of the specified Maintenance Period to verify completion and acceptance of the Work. -153-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 2
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

H. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

I. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use.

J. Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of undecayed plant and animal tissues, their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also called “humus” or “soil organic matter.”
K. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. Some sources classify herbicides separately from pesticides.

L. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

M. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.

N. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

O. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.

P. Pre-maintenance review: Observation by Architect to verify substantial completion of the Work. The Architect will generate a Punch List during this review. Maintenance Period will commence when Contractor has completed items on this Punch List and Architect has verified that the Punch List is complete.

Q. Punch List: List of work within the Contract, generated by Architect that needs to be completed, repaired, replaced, or rectified by Contractor.

R. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

S. Soil Test: Required testing performed by Contractor after site is rough graded. A current soil report is also required for import soil prior to transport to the site.

T. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards:

1. Provide plants and planting materials that meet or exceed specifications of Federal, State, and County laws requiring inspection for plant disease or insect control. -154-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 3
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

2. Provide quality and size conforming to current edition of “Horticultural Standards” for number one nursery stock as adopted by the American Association of Nurserymen.

3. Provide plants that are true to name. Tag one of each bundle or lot with the name and size of plants in accordance with the standards of practice of the American Association of Nurserymen.

4. Botanical names shall take precedence over common names.

B. Workmanship: Perform work in accordance with the best standards of practice for landscape work and under the continual supervision of a competent foreman capable of interpreting the Drawings and Specifications.

C. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of exterior plants.

D. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced and qualified full- time supervisor on project site when landscaping is in progress.

E. Quantities and Types: Plant materials shall be furnished in the quantities and/or spacings as shown or noted for each location, and shall be of the species, kinds, sizes, etc., as symbolized and/or described in the Plant List, and as indicated on the Drawings.

F. Verification of dimensions, quantities, and existing conditions

1. Scaled dimensions are approximate. Before proceeding with work, carefully check and verify dimensions and quantities and immediately inform the Architect of discrepancies between the Drawings and/or specifications and actual conditions. Do not start work in areas where there are discrepancies until approval for same has been given by the Architect.

2. Prior to the excavation for planting or placing of plant materials, the Contractor shall verify the location of all underground utility lines and other improvements and take proper precautions to avoid damage to such improvements. In the event of conflict between such improvements and plant locations, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and arrangements will be made for relocation as necessary. Failure to follow the procedure places upon the Contractor the responsibility for making any and all repairs for damage resulting from work as herein specifies at his own expense.

1.7 VERIFICATION AND PROTECTION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. All scaled dimensions on the drawings are approximate. Before proceeding with any work, the Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions, quantities, and grade elevations, and shall immediately inform the Owner of any discrepancies. Submit with the bid the proposed source of import soil (if utilized) and a recent test evaluation on the soil.

B. Prior to the excavation for planting or placing of plant materials, the Contractor shall verify the location of all underground utility lines and other improvements, and take proper precautions to avoid damage to such improvements. In the event of conflict between such improvements and plant locations, the Contractor shall notify the Owner, and arrangements will be made for relocation as necessary. Failure to follow this procedure places upon the Contractor the responsibility for making any and all repairs for damage resulting from work as herein specified at his own expense. -155-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 4
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

C. The specified soil amendments and their rates of application are for bidding purpose only. The Contractor shall verify the soil conditions through soil testing. See Part 3 for execution of soil amendments.

D. During the construction and maintenance period, the Contractor shall take every precaution to protect and avoid damage to sprinkler heads, irrigation lines, drainage lines, existing underground facilities, paving, structures, fixtures, and existing plantings.

The Contractor shall be held responsible for any and all damage to such improvements and shall completely repair or replace the same at no cost to the Owner.

1.8 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Upon 15 days after the Contractor has received the Owner's notice to proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Landscape Architect three (3) typewritten lists of all materials proposed with quantities, size, quality, and source.

B. Prior to installation of any landscape elements, the Contractor shall submit for approval by the Landscape Architect, a list of all materials and equipment proposed for use.

Submit product data for each type indicated for approval, such as (not all inclusive):

1. All soil conditioners, soil amendments, fertilizers, and other chemicals.

2. Imported soil.

3. Bark mulch.

4. Erosion control matting.

5. Fiber rolls.

6. Pesticides: Also, include copies of sample label and Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).

C. Soil Test: Contractor shall have import soil and the soil of the site tested for fertility, agricultural suitability, and appraisal by Soil and Plant Laboratory Inc. (714) 282-8777, or Wallace Labs (310) 615-0116.

1. Submit a copy of the Planting Plan and Plant Legend to the laboratory with the samples.

2. Soil shall be tested from a minimum of three (3) locations per acre of planted area.

Representative samples shall be taken from random and varied locations of the project site that will receive landscaping installation. Samples should represent major conditions of exposed cut soils, fill soils, and native undisturbed soil. Sample from the top foot for ground cover and shrubs. Sample from the expected depth for large container stock. Label each sample for location/origin, type of soil condition visibly observed, and sampling depth. Laboratory report shall identify each sample with same information. All samples taken shall be split into two samples, one half will go to a qualified laboratory by the Contractor (at his or her expense) and the other half will be retained by the Owner. All samples shall be at least one pint in volume. All samples shall go to an approved soil-testing laboratory.

3. A copy of the soil test results shall be submitted to the Owner and Architect before work begins.

4. Testing methods should comply with the United States Department of Agriculture Handbook Publication No. 60, Methods of Soil Analysis published by the Soil Science Society of America and peer-viewed methods published in scientific journals. Evaluations and recommendations should be based on University of California publication's and peer-viewed articles published in) scientific journals. -156-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 5
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

5. The Owner shall appoint a representative to oversee soil sampling that may be required. The time, depth, location, and number of samples to be taken as per instructions from the Owner.

6. Soil report shall include:
a. pH measurement.
b. Determination whether limestone is present or not.
c. Percent water in saturation extract.
d. Electrical conductivity of the saturated extract (salinity ECe) / soluble salts. e. Measurement of sodicity (Sodium Adsorption Ratio).
f. Concentration of boron in saturation extract.
g. Nutrients and elements:
1) Measurement (low, medium, high) of: Boron, calcium, copper, iron, magnesium, manganese, molybdenum, phosphorus, potassium, sodium, sulfur, and zinc.
2) Analyze saturation extract for: calcium, magnesium, sodium, boron, chloride, phosphorus, nitrate and sulfate.
3) Trace metals: Aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, nickel, selenium, silver, strontium, tin and vanadium. 4) The presence of calcium carbonate and/or magnesium carbonate. h. Soil Texture (gravel, sand, silt and clay). Determine organic matter content by the measurement of organic carbon. The quality of the organic matter shall be determined by measuring organic carbon and total nitrogen. 1) Methods of Soil Analysis, Part 1, Physical and Mineralogical Methods, Soil Science Society of America, Inc., 1986, chapter 36, pgs 901-926 and Methods of Soil Analysis, Part 3 Chemical Methods, Soil Science Society of America, Inc, 1996, chapter 34, pgs 965-977 & pgs 1001-2 and chapter 37, pg 1088
i. Interpretation and recommendations for correction of nutritional deficiencies/ excesses and potential toxicities. These recommendations shall include:
1) Volume of soil amendment per 1,000 sq.ft. and cu.yd. of backfill mix. 2) Pounds of gypsum per 1,000 sq.ft. and cu.yd. of backfill mix. 3) Pounds of soil sulfur per 1,000 sq .ft. and cu.yd. of backfill mix. 4) Pounds of iron sulfate per 1,000 sq.ft. and cu.yd. of backfill mix. 5) Pounds of pre-plant fertilizer per 1,000 sq.ft. and cu.yd. of backfill mix.
6) Pounds of soil polymers per 1,000 sq.ft.
7) Recommendation for soil leaching.
8) Pounds of maintenance fertilizer per 1,000 sq. Ft. and analysis. 9) Recommendation for soil wetting agent and application rate. 10) Percent of site soil-to-soil amendment in backfill mix. 11) Whether or not soil polymers need to be added to soil.

If any of the above listed items are not recommended, the recommendation shall call for zero volume or zero poundage per 1,000 square feet. All soil test costs will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. Legible copies of delivery slips for soil amendments , plant materials, rock products, and bark mulch specifying the quantities that were delivered. The contractor shall provide certificates, trip slips, and invoices to the Owner prior to final acceptance of the work.

E. Samples for verification for each of the following:
-157-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 6
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

1. Bark Much- 1 quart volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of with and source of mulch.

Each sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup.

2. Cobble Mulch- 2-3 stones in sealed plastic bags labeled. Each sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and size.

3. Top Soil- 1 quart volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials.

4. Actual samples of the soil amendments shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect only if requested by the Landscape Architect after approval of the soils test.

F. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons.

G. Substitutions for the indicated materials will only be permitted provided the substitute materials are approved in writing, in advance, by the Landscape Architect and the Owner.

All substitute materials shall conform to the requirements of these specifications. If accepted substitute materials are of less value than those indicated or specified, the contract price will be adjusted in accordance with the provisions of the contract.

1.9 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE
A. Site observations herein specified shall be made by the Landscape Architect during regular business hours. The Contractor or his authorized representative shall be on the site at the time of each observation. The Contractor will not be permitted to initiate the succeeding step of work until he has received approval to proceed by the Landscape Architect.

B. All changes and deviations to the plans and specifications shall be communicated to the Construction Manager and shall be confirmed in writing.

C. The Contractor shall have sufficient work personnel available during normal working hours to correct deficiencies immediately upon request of the Landscape Architect. Such repair or re-work services are to be performed without interference of regular project schedule.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Architect, in advance, for the following observations, according to the time indicated:

1. Pre-construction conference – seven (7) days, immediately prior to the commencement of work of this section, the Owner, Contractor, and Landscape Architect shall meet for the approval of the materials specified, equipment, schedule of work and the method of installation.

2. Incorporation of soil amendments- 48 hours, specified soil amendments are for bidding purposes only. A final soil test performed by an approved laboratory shall be submitted and paid for by the Contractor for agricultural suitability recommendations and approved by the Landscape Architect before planting begins.
-158-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 7
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

3. Final grade, soil preparation and planting area layout review - 72 hours, Upon the completion of soil amending, the finish grading and planter edging layouts in the field will be approved prior to planter edging installation. Shrub samples, three (3) each of all varieties and sizes (shrubs 5-gallon and under) shall be submitted for approval at the site a minimum of fifteen (15) days prior to planting operations for quality, size, variety, vigor, and rooting characteristics. Approved samples shall remain on the site and shall be maintained, by the Contractor as standards of comparison for plant materials to be furnished.

4. Plant materials review - 48 hours

5. Plant layout review - 48 hours, when material is spotted in place for planting, but prior to excavation of planting holes.

6. Planting operations - 48 hours

7. Completed planting (Pre-maintenance) walk through – seven (7) days, when planting and all specified work has been installed and completed, the Landscape Architect will prepare a written "punch list" indicating all items to be corrected.

These items must be completed prior to initiating the beginning date of the maintenance period. The Landscape Architect will inform the Owner and Contractor of the actual date of the start of the maintenance period in writing. This observation is not the final acceptance of the project, and does not relieve the Contractor from any of the responsibilities in the contract documents.

Final Site Observation and Acceptance of the Project – seven (7) days, At the conclusion of the maintenance period a final site observation will be made. The Contractor shall show all corrections made from the punch list." Any items deemed not acceptable shall be reworked and the maintenance period will be extended.

The Contractor will be notified in writing that the contract work and maintenance period has been accepted or that the maintenance period has been extended to correct any deficiencies remaining. Final acceptance of the project shall establish the beginning date for the guarantee period.

E. Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling site Observation visits with Architect as work progresses. Failure to schedule required Observations shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for obtaining approvals. Contractor shall redo, at no cost to the Owner, work that does not satisfy the Owner.

F. Observations may be waived or combined at the discretion of the Architect.

G. When someone other than the Architect conducts observations, the Contractor shall show evidence in writing of when and by whom these observations were made.

H. No site visits shall commence without adequate preparation or items noted in previous Observation Reports, either completed or remedied, unless the Owner has waived such compliance. Failure to adequately prepare or accomplish previous punch list items shall make the Contractor responsible for reimbursing the Architect for the site visit at his current billing rates per hour plus transportation costs. No further inspections will be scheduled until this charge has been paid and received.

I. Site observations of the work shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to fulfill all conditions of the contract.
-159-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 8
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in advance when material is scheduled for each delivery, in order to ensure satisfactory coordination of delivery and to expedite the required inspection at the point of delivery. The delivery of the material shall include invoices certifying that subject material has been inspected as required by the State Agricultural Code prior to acceptance or installation. Particular care, using approved equipment, shall be exercised to ensure safe loading, unloading, shipping and handling for all material from source to in place locations indicated on the drawings.

B. The Contractor shall furnish the Landscape Architect with three (3) copies of signed, legible certificates and/or invoices stating the quality and quantity of all items herein specified at time of delivery. Recommendation shall be made by the Landscape Architect or the Owner to stop work progress until certificates are received and reviewed by the Landscape Architect.

C. Upon delivery of materials and/or completion of all soil amending and with the heretofore specified signed copies of required certificates, trip slips and invoices for soil preparation materials the Landscape Architect shall invoice such material, comparing the total quantities of each material furnished against the total area of each operation. If the minimum rates of application have not been met, the Landscape Architect will require the distribution of additional quantities of these materials to fulfill the minimum application requirements specified.

D. After installation of plant materials, but prior to the pre-maintenance site observation, the Landscape Architect, with the heretofore specified signed copies of the required certificates and related items, shall invoice such material, comparing the total area and/or the amounts specified. If the minimum amounts have not been furnished, the Landscape Architect will require the installation of additional materials to fulfill the minimum requirements specified.

E. Deliver fertilizer or soil amendments to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trademark, and conformance to state law. Protect material from damage or breakage. Immediately remove empty containers from site. The contractor shall furnish the Architect with a copy of signed, legible certificates or invoices stating the quality and quantity of all items herein specified at the time of delivery.

F. Deliver plants with legible identification labels. Store plant material in shade and protect from weather or injury. Maintain in a healthy, vigorous condition. Architect may at time reject plant material not maintained in this condition.

G. Handling: Do not drop plants or pick up container plants by their stems or trunks.

1.11 SAMPLES AND TESTS:

A. Contractor shall submit soil samples for testing, per this Specification.

B. Architect reserves the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to specifications at any time. Contractor shall furnish samples upon request by Architect. -160-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 9
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

C. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site at the Contractor's expense.

D. Contractor shall pay cost of all testing or replacement of materials not meeting specifications.

1.12 WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT
A. Special warranty: All plant material 15-gallon size and larger shall be guaranteed to live and grow in a healthy condition during the Contract Period, Maintenance Period, and for a one (1) year period from the date of final acceptance. The Contractor shall not be held responsible for failure due to neglect by the Owner, vandalism, etc. during the guarantee period. Report such conditions to the Owner immediately in writing.

B. Special warranty: All plant material smaller than 15-gallon size shall be guaranteed to live and grow in vigorous, healthy, and upright condition for a minimum of ninety (90) days after final acceptance of work (excluding seasonal color).

C. Replacement: All plants not healthy and in a vigorous growing condition as determined by the Owner shall be replaced immediately. Plants used for replacement shall be the same kind and size as specified in the plant legend as shown on the drawings. They shall be furnished, planted, and fertilized as originally specified at no cost to the Owner.

1.13 SUSPENSION OF WORK
A. The Landscape Architect shall recommend to the Owner any necessity to suspend the work wholly, or in part, for such period or periods as he/she may deem necessary due to unsuitable weather, or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for the reasonable performance of the work, or for such time as is necessary due to the failure on the part of the Contractor to carry out orders given or to perform any or all provisions of the contract.

B. If it should become necessary to stop work for an indefinite period, the Contractor shall store all materials in such a manner that they will not become an obstruction nor become damaged in any way, and he shall take every precaution to prevent damage or deterioration of the work performed. The Contractor shall cover all open excavations and shall provide suitable drainage by opening ditches, planting pits, etc., and erect temporary structures where necessary.

C. Grading, soil preparation, and planting work shall be performed only during periods when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Excessive soil moisture that would destroy the soil structure, soil spreading, grading, and/or tilling operations shall be suspended until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels and the desired results are attainable. Moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty before working the soil.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 QUALITY
A. All materials shall be of standard, approved, and first grade quality and shall be in prime condition when installed and accepted. All commercially processed and/or packaged -161-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 10
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

materials shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis.

2.2 SITE SOIL
A. Site soil used to form landscape planting areas or backfill planters shall be clean, fertile, loamy soil, free of stones, sticks, stumps, or other deleterious matter one inch in diameter or larger. It shall also be free from wire, plaster, construction debris, or similar objects that would be a hindrance to planting or maintenance.

B. The Architect shall approve suitability of soil of the site after reviewing results of the soil test.

2.3 IMPORTED TOP SOIL
A. Definition

1. General - Imported soil shall be from a source outside the limits of the project selected by the Contractor and in compliance with the requirements specified herein. Imported soil shall be screened, fertile, friable soil from well-drained aerated land, and shall be free of roots, clods, heavy clay, pockets of coarse sand, stones larger than 1-inch in the greatest dimension, paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid or the like, obnoxious or invasive weeds (such as, but not all inclusive: Quackgrass, Johnsongrass, Poison Ivy, Nutsedge, Nimblewill, Canada Thistle, Bindweed, Bentgrass, Wild Garlic, Ground Ivy, Perennial Sorrel and/or Bromegrass), sticks, lumber, brush, other litter and/or refuse, or any material that might be deleterious to healthy plant growth. Imported soil shall not be infested with nematodes or other undesirable organisms, such as insects and disease causing plant pathogens. Imported soil shall be friable and have sufficient structure in order to give good tilth and aeration to the soil.

Continuous, air-filled pore space content on a volume/volume basis shall be at least 15 percent (15%) when moisture is present at field capacity. Soil shall have a field capacity of at least 15 percent (15%) on a dry weight basis.

2. At least 15 days before scheduled use, the proposed source of imported soil must be submitted to the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall submit a written request for approval, which shall be accompanied by a written report from an approved soil-testing laboratory registered by the State of California for agricultural soil evaluation, which states that the proposed source complies with these specifications. The imported soil shall meet the following requirements:

B. Gradation limits - Sand, 50-80 percent, clay 20 percent maximum, and silt, 30 percent maximum. Recommendations of sandy loam or loam per USDA definitions. The sand, clay and silt gradation limits shall be as defined by the USDA classification scheme.

Gravel over one-quarter-inch (1/4") in diameter shall be less than ten-percent (10%) by weight.

C. Permeability rate - Hydraulic conductivity rate shall be not less than 1-inch per hour nor more than 20-inches per hour when tested in accordance with the USDA Handbook Number 60, method 34b or other approved methods. Successful soil can have a permeability rate of 5 to 10-inches per hour.

D. Agricultural suitability - The soil shall be suitable to sustain the growth of the plants specified as per USDA specs.
-162-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 11
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

E. Fertility - The range of the essential elemental concentration in soil shall be as follows:

Ammonium Bicarbonate/DTPA Extraction parts per million (mg/kilogram) dryweight basis phosphorus 2 - 40
potassium 40 - 200
iron 2 - 35
manganese 0.3 - 6
zinc 0.6 - 8
copper 0.1 - 5
boron 0.2 - 1
magnesium 50 - 150
sodium 0 - 100
sulfur 25 - 500
molybdenum 0.1 – 30

F. Acidity - The soil pH range measured in the saturation extract (Method 21a, USDA Handbook Number 60) shall be 6.0 - 7.5.

G. Salinity - The salinity range measured in the saturation extract (Method 3a, USDA Handbook Number 60) shall be 0.5 - 2.0 dStm. If calcium and if sulfate ions both exceed 20 milliequivalents per liter in the saturation extract, the maximum salinity shall be 4.0 dS/mH.

H. Chloride - The maximum concentration of soluble chloride in the saturation extract (Method 3a, USDA Handbook Number 60) shall be 150 mgtl (parts per million).

I. Boron - The maximum concentration of soluble boron in the saturation extract (Method 3a, USDA Handbook Number 60) shall be 1 mgtl (parts per million).

J. Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR) - The maximum SAR shall be 3 measured per Method 20b, USDA Handbook Number 60.

K. Aluminum Available aluminum measured with the Ammonium Bicarbonate/DTPA Extraction shall be less than 5 parts per million.

L. Soil Organic Matter Content - Sufficient soil organic matter shall be present to impart good physical soil properties but not be excessive to cause toxicity or cause excessive reduction in the volume of soil due to decomposition of organic matter.

M. Calcium Carbonate Content - Free calcium carbonate (limestone) shall not be present.

N. Heavy Metals - The maximum permissible elemental concentration in the soil shall not exceed the following:

Ammonium Bicarbonate/DTPA Extraction parts per million (mg/kilogram) dry weight basis:

arsenic 2
cadmium 2
chromium 10
cobalt 2
lead 30
-163-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 12
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

mercury 1
nickel 5
selenium 3
silver 0.5
vanadium 3

If the soil pH is between 6 and 7, the maximum permissible elemental concentration shall be reduced 50%. If the soil pH is less than 6.0, the maximum permissible elemental concentration shall be reduced 75%. No more than three metals shall be present at 50% or more of the above values.

O. Phytotoxic Constituent, Herbicides, Hydrocarbons, etc. - Germination and growth of monocots and dicots shall not be restricted more than 10%. Total petroleum hydrocarbons shall not exceed 100 mg/kg dry soil measured per the modified EPA Method No. 8015. Total aromatic volatile organic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene and ethylbenzene) shall not exceed 2 mg/kg dry soil measured per EPA Methods No. 8020.

P. Soil Texture/Organic Matter - Provide information on the soil texture and soil organic matter.

2.4 SOIL AMENDMENTS AND FERTILIZER
A. Soil Conditioner - shall be a product that aids the structure of the soil consisting of rapidly decaying, slowly decaying and non-decaying material. The rate of decomposition of this amendment is very important.

1. The humus material shall have an ash content of no less than 8% and no more than 50%.

2. The pH of the material shall be between 6 and 7.5.

3. The salt content shall be less than 10 millimho/cm @ 25° C. (ECe less than 10) on a saturated paste extract.

4. Boron content of the saturated extract shall be less than 1.0 parts per million.

5. Silicon content (acid-insoluble ash) shall be less than 30%.

6. Calcium carbonate shall not be present if to be applied on alkaline soils.

7. Types of acceptable products are composts, manures, mushroom composts, straw, alfalfa, sludges, peat mosses etc. low in salts, low in heavy metals, free from weed seeds, free of pathogens and other deleterious materials.

8. Composted wood products are conditionally acceptable (stable humus must be present). Wood based products are not acceptable which are based on redwood or cedar.

9. Sludge-based materials are not acceptable if the soil already has a high level (toxic level) of zinc, copper or other heavy metals based on soil analysis.

10. Carbon:nitrogen ratio is less than 25: 1.

11. The compost shall be aerobic without malodorous presence of decomposition products.

12. The maximum particle size shall be 0.5 inch, 80% or more shall pass a NO. 4 screen.

Maximum total permissible pollutant concentrations in amendment in parts per million on a dry weight basis: arsenic: 20, cadmium: 15, chromium: 300, cobalt: 50, nickel: 100, copper: 150, lead: 200, mercury: 10, molybdenum: 60, selenium: 50, silver: 10, vanadium: 50, zinc: 300
-164-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 13
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

The commercial grade product used shall be Loamex, or approved equal.

B. Agricultural grade gypsum - shall be a (CaS04 - 2H20) calcium sulfate product minimum 92% grade. Ninety-percent (90%) shall pass a 50-mesh screen. Control of dust during application is mandatory. The commercial grade product used shall be U.S. Gypsum, Sof'n'Soil, Dolmar, or approved equal.

C. Sulfur (soil sulfur) - shall be elemental sulfur (99.5%) commercially manufactured so that a pure sulfur product is used. Sulfur is a constituent of three amino acids (cystine, methionne and cysteine) and is essential for protein synthesis. Sulfur is also supplied by gypsum. Sulfur is not effective until it is oxidizes. The bacteria are specific for this and are not common in alkaline soils. The oxidization may require months or years. Gypsum is rapid in its actions. The sulfur used shall be 99.5% elemental. Sizing on stacked screen shall be approximately: 8-mesh 4.3%; 20-mesh 7.8 %; 50-mesh 46.9 %; 100-mesh 39.3 %; 200-mesh 1.7%. The commercial grade product used shall be Wil-Gro; Union Chemicals, Baker Industries, or approved equal.

D. Iron sulfate - derived from sulfate-deep green (FeS04, 7H20), a minimum analysis of iron shall be expressed as metallic is 20.0%. The commercial grade product used shall be Wil-Gro, Bandini, Wilson & Geo. Meyer, or approved equal.

E. Chelated iron shall be Becker Underwood Sprint 138 Fe or other approved equal commercial FeEDDHA for dicots and woody plants, and Becker Underwood Sprint 330 Fe or other commercial FeDTPA for grasses and monocots, or approved equal.

F. Pre-plant starter fertilizer (1-10-10) analysis shall be a commercial grade flowable fertilizer with a 1 % nitrogen analysis; 10% phosphorous pentoxide and 10% potassium oxide. No potassium chloride is to be used. Organic nitrogen shall be from cottonseed meal and urea. Phosphorous. from superphosphate and cottonseed meal. Potassium (potash) from sulfate of potash and cottonseed meal. Screen analysis 74% to be retained on a 20-mesh screen. 0% to pass a 4-mesh screen, and 2 % to pass a 48-mesh screen.

The commercial grade product used shall be Wil-Gro, Gro-Power, Bandini, Kellogg, or approved equal.

G. Prilled post-plant fertilizer (14-7-3) for maintenance - all areas. A maintenance fertilizer shall be used that is granular and homogeneous. Iron and zinc shall be in chelated form and sizing of granules during manufacture is very important. A regular maintenance program using this product for at least the first year is recommended. The homogeneous fertilizer granules used shall contain a fertilizer analysis of 14% nitrogen of which 4% is ammoniac sulfate. Remainder of nitrogen shall be 8.75% water soluble and 1.25% water insoluble. Available phosphorous pentoxide shall be 7%. Potassium oxide shall be 3%.

Minor elements shall be chelated 25% by volume consisting of iron 2.0%; zinc 0.15% and manganese 0.15%. By-product calcium shall be 2.0%. Organic nitrogen is derived from urea and cottonseed meal. Phosphate from superphosphate and cottonseed meal.

Potash from sulfate of potash and cottonseed meal. No potassium chloride is 'to be used.

Sulfur from sulfate of ammonia. Calcium from superphosphate, iron \ from ferrous sulfate and mixed sulfides. Zinc and manganese are expressed as metallic and in their elemental form. Screen Analysis (% retained) approximately: 4-mesh 1.3%; 8 mesh =

24.2%; 20-mesh = 74.0%; and 48-mesh = 0.05%. The commercial grade product used shall be Wil-Gro Fairway, Gro-Power, Bandini, Kellogg, or approved equal. -165-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 14
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

H. Planting tablets shall be tightly compressed chip type commercial grade planting tablets, of varying sizes with the following available percentages by weight of plant food:

Nitrogen 20.0 % min.

Phosphoric acid 10.0% min.

Potash 5.0 % min.

The commercial grade product used shall be Agriform, Gro-power, or approved equal.

2.5 WETTING AGENT
A. An adjuvant (helping agent) is needed to make water penetrate difficult to wet soils. Also, organic soil amendments are more receptive to increased water holding capacity.

B. Soil water repellence resulting from compaction will be overcome with multiple applications of a soil penetrant in the irrigation water.

C. Product used shall have the following functioning agents: 2- hydroxyethyl ammoniumalkyl benzene sulfonate = 8.77%; alkyl phenoxy poly - (ethylene oxy) ethanol=

4.49%; di (2 hydroxy ethyl)- ammonium cis-9 otadecenoate-octyl alkyldiamide = 2.50 %; dimethyl silicone = 1. 00 %; carrier= 83.24 %. Adjuvant used shall be a commercial grade product and manufactured by Naiad/Wil-Gro, Dow, Dupont, or approved equal.

2.6 PLANTING BACKFILL FOR SHRUBS
A. (For Bidding purposes only. Application rates shall be per soil analysis recommendation) Planting backfill shall be a thoroughly blended mixture of site soil and soil amendments at the following mixtures:

soil conditioner 30%
site soil from excavated planting pit 70%
gypsum 10 lbs. per cu. yd. of mix
iron sulfate 5 lbs. per cu. yd. of mix
pre-plant (1-10-10) 5 lbs. per cu. yd. of mix

2.7 PLANT TABLETS
A. 7 gram planting tablet designed for 12 month slow release. 12-8-8 NPK, 20% humus, 4% humic acids, 3.5% sulfur, 2% iron, micronutrients.

2.8 PLANT MATERIAL
A. Nomenclature: Scientific and common names of plants herein specified shall conform with the approved names given in "Checklist Of Woody Ornamental Plants of California", published by the University of California, College of Agriculture, Manual 32 (1963).

B. Labeling: Each group of plant materials delivered on site shall be clearly labeled as to species and variety. However, final determination of plant species and variety will be made by the Landscape Architect and whose decision will be final. All patented plants (cultivars) required by the plant list shall be delivered with a proper plant patent label attached. -166-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 15
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

C. Quality: Quality of all plants shall conform to the American Nursery & Landscape Association (AN LA) American Standard For Nursery Stock ANSI Z-60. 1-2004 (Approved May 12, 2004).

Plants shall be vigorous or normal growth, free from disease, insects, insect eggs, insect larvae, and other pests. Plant materials shall not contain any deleterious, obnoxious, or invasive weeds such as (not all inclusive): Quackgrass, Johnsongrass, Poison Ivy, Nutsedge, Nimblewill, Canada Thistle, Bindweed, Bentgrass, Wild Garlic, Ground Ivy, Perennial Sorrel and/or Bromegrass. All plants shall equal or exceed any measurements specified and shall be supplied from the source indicated when a source is specified.

D. Container stock: Shall have grown in containers for at least six (6) months and through one (1) full growing season, but not over two (2) years. Samples shall be shown to prove that no girdled roots, circled roots, and/or root-bound conditions are present. Any such shrubs shall be deemed as not acceptable. All container plants that have a cracked or broken rootball when taken from the container shall not be planted except on special approval from the Owner or the Landscape Architect.

E. Pruning: At no time shall the plant materials be pruned, trimmed, or topped prior to delivery, and any alteration on the site of their shape shall be conducted only with the approval and in the presence of the Landscape Architect.

F. Inspection of plant materials required by city, county, state, and/or federal authorities, and/or other regulatory agencies, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. When necessary, the Contractor shall have secured permits or certificates prior to delivery of plants at site.

G. Inspection of plant materials: Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval or rejection at the project site at any time before or during progress of work for size, variety, condition, latent defects and injuries. Rejected plants shall be removed from the project site immediately.

H. Rejection and substitution: All plants not conforming to the requirements herein specified and/or as indicated on the drawings shall be considered defective, and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as rejected and be immediately removed from the site of the work and replaced with acceptable plant materials. Under no condition will there be any substitution of plant species, variety, or reduced size for those listed on the accompanying drawings, except with the express written consent of the Landscape Architect.

I. Right to changes: The Landscape Architect reserves the right to change the plant species, plant variety, and/or sizes of plant material to be furnished, provided that the cost of such plant changes does not exceed the cost of plants in the original bid. The Contractor shall be notified in writing sixty (60) days before the planting operation has commenced. Field changes to the plant species, plant variety, and/or sizes of plant material might be required due to current availability, and shall be coordinated with the Landscape Architect and Owner. Changes in the size and/or variety of any plant to be furnished which involves a reduction or addition in cost shall be adjusted in the contract cost.

J. Root condition: The Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect root condition of any species, particularly those grown from seed, and if found defective, to reject the plants represented by the defective sample.

K. Protection: All plants at all times shall be handled and stored so that they are adequately protected from drying out, from wind burn, and from all other injury. All plants determined by the Landscape Architect or Owner to be wilted, burned, or dried out, may be rejected at any time, whether in the ground or not. All plants shall be handled solely by their containers and -167-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 16
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

all plants that have been handled by the stem or trunk shall be rejected, and removed from the site immediately. The Contractor's on-site plant storage area shall be approved by the General Contractor prior to the delivery of any plant materials.

2.9 GROUNDCOVER
A. Groundcover plants shall be grown in one (1) gallon pots, fiats, or other approved containers, variety and sizes as indicated on the planting plan and legend. Flat grown plants (rooted cuttings) shall remain in those flats until transplanting. The soil in the flats shall contain sufficient moisture so that it will not fall apart when lifting the plants. Flat grown plants shall be fully rooted, with top vegetation that is not overgrown in relation to the size of the flat. Plants shall be protected at all times to prevent drying of the root ball.

2.10 PESTICIDES
A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.

2.11 WATER:

A. Furnished by Owner.

B. Transport by Contractor as required.

2.12 MULCH:

A. Bark Mulch:

1. Forest Mulch as supplied by AgriService, telephone: (760) 295-6255, or approved equal.

2. No shredded lumber products, animal waste, or C&D wood by-products will be accepted.

3. Shall be derived from tree trimmings, wood, and bark PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION:

A. Site acceptance:

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his work with the General Contractor and other Sub-Contractors so no damage occurs to plantings after installation.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying grades and site conditions before beginning work. No change in Contract price will be owed for actual or claimed -168-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 17
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

discrepancy between existing grade and those shown on the plan after Contractor has accepted existing grades and moved on the site.

B. General: The areas to receive shrubs, ground covers, seed planting, and other vegetation and their respective requirements for imported soil, fertilizer applications, soil amendments, and other treatments shall be as defined on the drawings. Equipment necessary for preparation of the ground surface and for handling and placing all required material shall be readily available and in proper working condition.

C. Scheduling: Perform planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable, as approved by Architect.

D. Utilities: Prior to excavation for planting or installation of stakes or guys, Contractor shall locate utility lines and cables, so that proper precautions will be taken not to damage them. In the event of a conflict between utility lines and plant locations, promptly notify the Architect, who shall arrange for the relocation of one or the other. Failure to follow this procedure shall make the Contractor responsible for repairing damages at his own expense.

E. Clearing and Grubbing: Prior to ripping and tillage operations, all existing vegetation in the area to be planted shall be grubbed, raked, and cleared from the site. The subsoil and ground surface shall be cleared of all material which has accumulated during construction activities, and all material which might hinder proper grading, tillage, planting, future plant health, and subsequent maintenance operations. The Contractor shall lawfully dispose of all grubbed materials and debris off the site at his or her expense.

The Contractor shall completely remove any masonry, asphaltic concrete, and concrete from planting areas if present, and lawfully dispose of off site at his expense. Do not bury any grubbed materials, debris, masonry, asphaltic concrete, concrete, paints, chemicals, or other deleterious substances within any planting area on the project. Completely remove any concrete and plaster slurry / washout from planting areas if present, and remove the soil a minimum depth of 2-inches below a slurry / washout location.

F. The irrigation system shall be operational and approved prior to planting.

G. Underground Obstructions: All subsurface rocks over 2-inches in diameter and other underground obstructions shall be removed to the depth necessary to permit proper fine grading, tilling, or planting according to plans and specifications, a minimum depth of 6- inches. All abandoned utility lines uncovered or severed shall be cut below grade and capped or plugged with concrete. Explosives, shall not be used for removal. When the location of utility lines is shown on the plans or has been made known to the Contractor, all damage to these lines shall be repaired by the Contractor in a manner approved by the Owner and affected utility purveyor.

H. Deep Ripping: All areas to receive shrubs, groundcover, hydroseeding, and turf shall be deep-ripped and loosened to a depth of 12-inches in all directions. Access roads used during construction activities within planting areas shall be deep-ripped and loosened to a depth of 3 feet in all directions. (NOT USED)
I. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations. -169-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 18
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

J. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

3.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS, FERTILIZING AND ROTOTILLING:

A. The following specified soil amendments and fertilizers are guidelines for bidding purposes only. At the time of rough grade, the Contractor shall meet with the Owner to determine quantity and locations of soil samples to be taken. The soil tests/analysis are the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit soil samples from the site to an approved soil-testing laboratory for agricultural suitability analysis. The Contractor shall submit the results of the soil tests/analysis to the Landscape Architect for interpretation and recommendations. If the test results reduce or increase the quantities specified, then the Owner shall be notified. The contract prices shall be adjusted to reflect any differences between the amendments as specified below and the recommendations of the soil-testing laboratory.

B. After the areas have been deep ripped, the following rates of soil amendment materials shall be evenly spread over all planting areas and shall be thoroughly scarified to an average depth of 8-inches by rototilling a minimum of 2 alternating passes. Amendments must be intimately blended with soil.

Soil Conditioner: 4 cu.yd. per 1,000 sq. ft.

Gypsum: 100 Ibs. per 1,000 sq. ft.

Soil Sulfur: 20 pounds per 1,000 sq. ft.

Iron Sulfate: 20 pounds per 1,000 sq. ft.

Triple superphosphate (0-45-0) 4 pounds per 1,000 sq. ft.

Potassium sulfate (0-0-50) 8 pounds per 1,000 sq. ft.

1. Leaching shall be done prior to the application of soil conditioner, gypsum, soil sulfur, iron sulfate, and pre-plant fertilizer.

2. The thoroughness and completeness of the rototilling and incorporation of the soil amendments shall be acceptable to the Owner. Adjust soil amendments and fertilizers on all slopes with gradients of 2: 1 and steeper, or as indicated on the drawings.

3. Deep Water Leaching And Follow-Up Soil Testing:
a. After rototilling in soil amendments, the area shall be deep water leached a minimum of three (3) times. Apply water slowly and avoid runoff. Allow the soil to drain thoroughly and partially dry out between applications. The total amount of water applied may be between 3 to 12-inches depending on the depth and degree of improvement. The soil type (sand, silt, or clay) will determine the amount of time required for the soil to dry out between leaching processes. Do not apply more water if the soil saturation exceeds 50% between applications. Treat and/or remove weeds that germinate. b. One day after final application of water, the soil shall be tested for content of soluble salts (electrical conductivity or E.C.). The Owner and the Contractor shall take several soil samples from the top 6-inches of sailor the depth of planting for that particular area, and deliver the samples to an approved laboratory for testing of soluble salts. Reference Section 02900, -170-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 19
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

for a listing of approved soil testing laboratories. The E.C. test reading shall not be above 3.0 millimho/cm. 3.
c. If soil test reading for E.C. for a particular area tested is above 3.0 millimho/cm, the soil amending, tilling and deep watering procedure shall be repeated until test readings are not above 3.0 millimho/cm. d. Care shall be taken that the rate of application of water does not cause erosion, sloughing of soils, damage to paving, damage to hardscape elements, or damage to structures. Contractor assumes all responsibility for monitoring of all areas during leaching period.
e. All depressions, voids, erosion scars and settled trenches generated by the deep watering shall be filled with amended soil and brought to finish grade. f. Uniformly spread amendments and thoroughly cultivate by means of mechanical tiller per Soils Report.

3.3 IMPORTED SOIL
A. Subgrades of all planting areas (as noted on the plans to receive imported soil), shall be established at below finish grade in order to accommodate imported soil.

B. The subgrade shall be scarified a minimum depth of 2-inches before placement of the imported soil. Compacted subgrade needs to be ripped. Place 2-inches of import soil and till to 4-inches depth, to form a fifty-fifty (50/50) blend 4-inches in depth in order to avoid a sharp interface of soil types.

C. Placement: of the imported soil shall be smooth and even in all planting areas. Finish grades in lawn areas shall be 1-inch below adjacent finished paving surfaces and 2- inches in shrub areas without abrupt changes in gradient, not only in the surface of the soil but also where soil meets walks, curbs, pavement or other features, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

3.4 SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH GRADING
A. Rough Grade: Site to be received by Landscape Installer to within one-tenth-of-a-foot (0.1'), plus or minus, by others based on Civil Engineer's drawings.

B. Finish Grade: Finish grading to consist of grading, raking, watering in, mechanically compacting and settling to achieve desired contour and flow line patterns resulting in evenly finished surface.

C. All undulations and irregularities in the planting surfaces resulting from tillage, rototilling and all other operations shall be leveled and floated out before planting operations are initiated.

D. Finish grades shall insure positive drainage of the site with all surface drainage away from buildings, walls, over mow curbs, and toward roadways, drains and catch basins.

Planting surfaces shall be graded with no less than two-percent (2%) surface slope for positive drainage.

E. The Contractor shall take every precaution to protect and avoid damage to existing sprinkler heads, irrigation lines, and other underground utilities during soil amending and fertilizing operations.
-171-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 20
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

F. All rocks, debris, and other deleterious materials shall be removed from planting areas, and then from the site. Rocks in accordance with the following criteria: one-half-inch (1/2") diameter in hydroseed areas; 1-inch diameter in turf areas and groundcover areas; 2-inches diameter in shrub areas a minimum depth of 6- inches, and three-eighths-inch (3/8") from the top 2-inches in turf areas.

G. Final finish grade shall be one-inch below finish paving surface in adjacent lawn areas and 2-inches in shrub areas, and decomposed granite areas. Final grades shall be acceptable to the Owner before planting operations will be allowed to begin.

H. Ease top and toe of all existing and new slopes.

3.5 PLANTING INSTALLATION – GENERAL
A. Timing: Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable and in accordance with locally acceptable practice.

B. Layout of planting: Locations shall be approved by the Landscape Architect. All container plants shall be set by the Contractor in their final location in their respective containers prior to digging holes and/or planting. All plant locations shall be checked for possible interference with existing underground utility lines.

C. Backfill for shrubs: shall be as specified in this section. If artificial drainage is requested, then drains shall be installed first, then backfilled with soil.

D. Disposal of excess soil and debris - all excess excavated subsoil, rocks and debris shall be legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor at his or her cost or utilized on the site as directed by and at the option of the Owner. Use the more suitable soil excavated from the planting pit, and dispose the less suitable soil. Do not place unamended soil over amended soil.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

B. Excavate approximately 2 times as wide as ball diameter for boxed and container-grown stock.

C. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball.

D. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling.

E. Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials as shown on the Drawings. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements.
-172-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 21
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

F. Excavation shall include the stripping and stacking of all acceptable soil encountered within the areas to be excavated for plant pits and planting beds. Protect all areas that are to be trucked over and upon which soil is to be temporarily stacked pending its re- use for the filling of holes, pits, and beds.

G. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours.

H. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's personnel.

I. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil.

J. Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to shrubs are encountered in excavations.

K. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch diameter holes, 24-inches apart, into free draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet, whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.

L. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in shrub planting pits.

M. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning shrubs.

3.7 PLANTING SHRUBS AND ORNAMENTAL GRASSES
A. Soil moisture level in planting areas at time of planting shall be no less than horticulturally acceptable. The Contractor shall request approval of moisture, and if found to be insufficient for planting, the planting pits shall be filled with water and allowed to drain before starting any planting operations.

B. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1.

If root -flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements.

C. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.

D. Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of excavated planting pit or trench with root flare 1-inch above adjacent finish grades.

1. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.

2. Use planting soil with the heretofore specified amendments for backfill.

3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

4. Do not cover the top of the rootball with backfill soil, which might create soil interface conflicts and inhibit aeration and gaseous exchange.

5. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one half filled; in amounts recommended below. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1-inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole. See below for application rates.
-173-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 22
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

6. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

E. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for all surface and subsurface drainage required which may affect his / her guarantee of the shrubs, ornamental grasses and vines.

G. Planting tablets shall be placed in each planting hole at the following rates and per the manufacturer's recommendations (soil reports from soil-testing laboratory supercede application rates in this section, if different):

1. One 5-gram tablet per individual liner and flat size plant.

2. One 21-gram tablet per 1 gallon container.

3. Three 21-gram tablets per 5 gallon container.

Random testing to verify planting tablet installation shall be conducted by the Owner.

H. Immediately after planting, install a soil berm around the perimeter of each planting pit to create an enclosed water basin, except in turf locations. The height of the soil berm shall be 3-inches for shrubs. All plants shall be thoroughly watered to the full depth of each planting hole. If water slowly moves into the rootball from the backfill soil, dual berms may be needed. One over the rootball and another one at the edge of the backfill so that each one can be separately irrigated. Drip irrigation can be used to irrigate difficult rootballs.

I. Pruning after planting shall be required on all shrubs, and vines when necessary to provide the specified or approved standard shapes, form and/or sizes characteristic to each plant. Pruning shall be required when necessary to provide horizontal and/or vertical sight line clearance. Pruning may include thinning and/or cutting and shall be under the direction of the Landscape Architect. Pruning cuts shall not be painted with tree sealants.

3.8 PLANTING GROUNDCOVER
A. Groundcovers shall be planted in the areas indicated on the plans, and shall be installed only after all debris and surface rocks 1-inch diameter and larger have been removed from the planting area.

B. If the top 4-inches of soil in the area to be planted in groundcover is not sufficiently moist (horticulturally acceptable standards), the area shall be thoroughly irrigated and no less than 12 hours shall pass before planting.

C. Groundcovers shall be planted in even, triangularly spaced rows, at the intervals called out for in the legend on the drawings, unless otherwise noted.

D. The size of planting excavation for groundcover shall be at least twice the width of the root ball.
-174-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 23
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

E. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, each plant shall be planted in a manner that will ensure minimum disturbance of the root system, but in no case shall this depth be less than two (2) nodes.

F. Each groundcover plant shall be planted with one 5-gram planting tablet incorporated into the root zone. Planting area shall be hand-smoothed after planting to provide an even and smooth final finished grade. To avoid drying out and damaging groundcover, plants must be irrigated after planting. This may be done manually or by using the installed irrigation system. Repeated applications may be required, especially on a sloping site. This initial irrigation procedure shall continue until the soil profile is thoroughly moistened to field capacity a minimum depth of twice the depth of each planting hole.

3.9 BARK MULCH
A. All planter areas shall be evenly covered with bark mulch to a uniform depth of 3 inches.

B. Provide 3- inches of horizontal clearance away from the collar of shrubs and ornamental grasses, and 2-inches of horizontal clearance away from the basal stem of ground covers.

C. Bark mulch will be required on all planter areas with a slope gradient shallower than two- to-one (2:1).

3.10 PESTICIDE APPLICATIONS.

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work.

C. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

D. No restricted pesticides shall be used.

E. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply to shrub, and groundcover areas in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas.

F. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.11 CLEAN UP
A. After planting operations have been completed, remove trash, excess soil, empty plant containers, and rubbish from the property, and dispose of legally.

B. Cleanup shall be performed at the end of each working day, with a maximum cleanup effort (in a manner satisfactory to the Owner) for each weekend or Holiday. -175-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 24
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

C. The Contractor shall sweep the site and shall wash down pavement within the Contract area, leaving the premises in a clean condition.

D. Walks shall be left in a clean and safe condition.

E. Scars, ruts, or other marks in the ground caused by this work shall be repaired and the ground left in a smooth condition throughout the site.

3.12 GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND THE MAINTENANCE PERIOD
A. Keeping the plants in a healthy, growing condition by watering, fertilizing, pruning, spraying, weeding and all other necessary operations of maintenance. All paving and walks shall be kept clear, clean and washed down.

B. Protection: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate protection of all planting areas against traffic or other use by erecting fencing or other acceptable means immediately after the planting is completed. Warning signs and barricades shall be placed in various high traffic areas. Damaged areas shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor.

C. Weeding and cultivating: All shrub, groundcover, vine, turf, and hydroseeded areas shall be kept free of weeds, noxious grasses, rocks over 1-inch in diameter, clods, trash and debris on a weekly basis. Groundcover and shrub areas shall be cultivated at intervals of not more than 14 days minimum.

D. Replacement: During the Maintenance Period, plants which die or which are in an unhealthy or badly impaired condition shall be replaced by the contractor within 14 days after unsatisfactory condition is evident. No replacement of plantings shall be made in any season definitely unfavorable for planting. At the conclusion of the Maintenance Period, the Landscape Architect will make an inspection of the work to determine the condition of all plants. All unhealthy plants shall be removed from the site and replaced with plants of the same kinds and sizes as originally specified. Such replacement shall be made in the same manner as specified for the original planting and at no extra cost to the Owner.

E. Fertilization:

1. Shrubs - post fertilization shall occur 60 days after planting and apply fertilizer at the rate of 1 teaspoon per each one-gallon plant and 1 tablespoon per five-gallon plant. Fertilizer shall be 14-7-3, or approved equal.

2. Groundcover and lawn areas - post fertilization shall occur 60 days after planting and apply fertilizer at the rate of 7-lbs per 1,000 square feet fertilizer shall be 14- 7-3, or approved equal.

F. Maintenance Period: The Maintenance Period shall begin on the first day after the pre- maintenance observation acceptance and shall continue thereafter for no less than 90 continuous calendar days. If any plants are replaced during the Maintenance Period, then the 90-day Maintenance Period for those plants shall begin at the date of installation for that plant, if so directed by the Landscape Architect or the Owner.

G. Extended Maintenance Period: When, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, there is improper maintenance, and/or poor condition of plant materials, and/or unhealthy condition of plant materials, then the Contractor shall be responsible for additional -176-

329000 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING - 25
BELLFLOWER GATEWAY 09/14/2020

BELLFLOWER, CA

maintenance of the work at no additional cost to the contract until all work is acceptable by the Landscape Architect.

END OF SECTION

-177-

BELLFLOWER GATEWAY

SIGN PROGRAM DESIGN INTENT
Date: 06/06/2022
Revised 08/30/2022
Prepared by:-178-

SHEET INDEX:

SIGNAGE DESIGN INTENT DRAWINGS
G1 SITE PLAN AND SIGN LOCATION PLAN
G2 SIGNAGE PHOTO COMPOSITE
G3 SIGNAGE DESIGN INTENT DRAWINGS
G4 SIGNAGE DESIGN INTENT DRAWINGS & COLOR SPECIFICATIONS G5 BRONZE SCULPTURE INFORMATION
G6 ELECTRONIC DISPLAY CUT SHEET
G7 ELECTRONIC DISPLAY DETAILS AND STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS

CUT SHEET

STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING
S1 STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS / PLANS
S2 STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS
S3 STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS
S4 STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS
S5 STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS
S6 STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS
S7 STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS

ELECTRIAL ENGINEERING PLANS
E1 ABBREVIATION, GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOL LEGEND
E2 TITLE 24 COMPLIANCE FORMS
E3 TITLE 24 COMPLIANCE FORMS
E4 TITLE 24 COMPLIANCE FORMS
E5 SINGLE DIAGRAM, CALCULATIONS, PANEL SCHEDULES
E6 ELECTRICAL PLAN

LANDSCAPE
L1 SIGN LOCATION AND PLANTING PLAN
L2 LANDCAPE LEGEND
L3 LANDSCAPE GENERAL NOTES
L4 LANDSCAPE GENERAL NOTES
L5 LANDSCAPE GENERAL NOTES
L6 LANDSCAPE DETAILS
L7 LANDSCAPE DETAILS
L8 LANDSCAPE DETAILS
L9 LANDSCAPE DETAILS
L10 LANDSCAPE DETAILS
L11 LANDSCAPE DETAILS
L12 LANDSCAPE DETAILS
L13 LANDSCAPE DETAILS
L14 LANDSCAPE DETAILS
L15 LANDSCAPE DETAILS
L16 LANDSCAPE DETAILS
L17 LANDSCAPE DETAILS
L18 LANDSCAPE DETAILS -179-

SIGNAGE
-180-

SHEET
DATE
W.O.

SCALE
6537
08/23/2022

AS NOTED
JWBDESIGNER Bellflower Gateway_DesInt.aiBELLFLOWER GATEWAYSIGN PROGRAM DESIGN INTENTG1 NORTH
ALONDRA BLVD.BELLFLOWER BLVD.SIGN LOCATION PLAN
SCALE: 1”= 20’-0”

EXISTING

TRAFFIC
LIGHT

EXISTING

TRAFFIC
LIGHT

VACINITY MAP

NOT TO SCALE

11.5°19'-5"33'-8"
18'-7"38'-2"45°

GATEWAY MONUMENT

SCULPTURE

SIGN LEGEND
A
B
A
B
N
08/19/2022
-181-

SHEET
DATE
W.O.

SCALE
6537
08/23/2022

AS NOTED
JWBDESIGNER Bellflower Gateway_DesInt.aiBELLFLOWER GATEWAYSIGN PROGRAM DESIGN INTENTG2 08/19/2022
-182-

SHEET
DATE
W.O.

SCALE
6537
08/23/2022

AS NOTED
JWBDESIGNER Bellflower Gateway_DesInt.aiBELLFLOWER GATEWAYSIGN PROGRAM DESIGN INTENTG3GATEWAY MONUMENT - FRONT VIEW SCALE: 3/8"=1'-0"

TOP VIEW
SCALE: 3/8"=1'-0"

SIDE VIEW
SCALE: 3/8"=1'-0"
1 SIGN CABINETS: ALUMINUM SIGN CABINET (MIN. 1/8" THICK),

WELDED CONSTRUCTION, SEAMLESS IN APPEARANCE, PAINT
FINISHED. CABINETS WITH AN INTERNAL ALUMINUM ANGLE STRUC- TURE. MINIMIZE EXPOSED ATTACHMENT HARDWARE. WHERE

ALUMINUM CONTACTS STEEL SUPPORT STRUCTURE, SEPARATE
WITH NEOPRENE GASKET MATERIAL. ALL FASTENERS TO BE STAIN-

LESS STEEL TYPE AND HEADS TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES.
2 FLOWER SHAPE SCULPTURE: “REVERSE CHANNEL” FLOWER SHAPE AND STEM, WITH INTERNAL GREEN L.E.D. ILLUMINATION FOR A HALO EFFECT OVER SIGN CABINET . FABRICATE FROM ALUMI-
NUM, MIN.1/8" THICKNESS. PAINT FINISH.. WHERE FLOWER SHAPE

EXTENDS BEYOND TOP AND SIDE OF CABINET , BLOCK OFF/
REVERSE CHANNEL WITH AN ALUMINUM PANEL. PAINT FINISH.

FLOWER IS PINNED 1 1/2" AWAY FROM FACE OF CABINET .

FLOWER SHAPE FACE IS CUT OUT OF ALUMINUM, AND BACKED WITH

TRANSLUCENT BLUE ACRYLIC, AND IS INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED WITH WHITE LED LIGHTS 5000 K. APPLY WHITE DIFFUSER FILM ON ACRYLIC SECOND SURFACE. NO HOT OR DARK SPOTS ON FLOWER
FACE.
3 VERTICAL BARS: PAINT FINISHED ALUMINUM “CHANNEL” WELDED TO CABINET . FACE OF CHANNEL TO HAVE A TRANSLUCENT

ACRYLIC FACE AND BE INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED WITH WHITE LED LIGHTS 5000 K. - NO TRIM CAPS.
4 DOWNTOWN BELLFLOWER LETTERS: WELDED ALUMINUM REVERSE
CHANNEL LETTERS, 3.5" DEPTH WITH A 1.5" STANDOFF. INTERNAL WHITE WHITE LED ILLUMINATION 5000 K. SEAMLESS
IN APPEARANCE, PAINT FINISHED.
5 ELECTRONIC DISPLAY: HIGH DEFINITION OUTDOOR L.E.D.

MESSAGE CENTER DISPLAY, 2’-11” x 7’-6” CABINET SIZE,
8 MM RGB LED MATRIX DAKTRONICS GALAXY GT6X SERIES. SEE
CUT-SHEETS ON PAGES 06, AND 07.
6 TENANT PANEL: POP-THRU ACRYLIC LETTERS ON A REMOVABLE ALUMINUM FACE PANEL, PAINT FINISHED TO MATCH SIGN CABINET.

INTERNAL L.E.D. ILLUMINATION FOR LETTERS TO BE WHITE LED 5000 K. ATTACH WITH STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERSUNK FLAT HEAD SCREWS. PAINT FINISH HEADS TO MATCH CABINET.
7 CONCRETE BASE / FOOTING: SEE STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING
SHEETS FOR DETAILS. CAST CONCRETE IN NATURAL GREY COLOR, SMOOTH FINISH.
8 STEEL STRUCTURE: SEE STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING SHEETS FOR SPECIFICATIONS.
6 5
4 COPY AREA
NOTE:

THE SIGN CONTRACTOR MUST VISIT THE SITE AND FULLY INFORM

THEMSELVES AS TO ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS, FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION AND CONDITION FOR SIGN.

FABRICATOR TO PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS TO DETAIL ALL

CONSTRUCTION, ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING SPECIFICATIONS
FOR CLIENT REVIEW PRIOR TO START OF PROJECT.
2 TRANSLUCENT

ACRYLIC PANELS

TRANSLUCENT

ACRYLIC PANELS
3 3
2 1
7 1
7 1
2 FINISH GRADE

FINISH GRADE
A
03 TENANT NAME

FLOWER STEMVERTICAL BARS

SPACE BETWEEN

FLOWER STEM &
SIGN CABINET 89 3/8"11 3/8"4"2'-11"2'-7 "7'-6"8'-0 "17'-5"19'-0 "3'-7" 8'-0"
9'-7"1'-10"7'-6"
4"
4"1'-9 5/8"
1'-10"
5"3 3/8"8 5/8"11"1 5/8"2 1/2"
1 1/2"
3'-4"
2'-11"4'-5"
5'-0"3'-4"2'-11"1'-9 5/8"1'-10"4"2 1/2"2 1/2"08/19/2022 -183-

SHEET
DATE
W.O.

SCALE
6537
08/23/2022

AS NOTED
JWBDESIGNER Bellflower Gateway_DesInt.aiBELLFLOWER GATEWAYSIGN PROGRAM DESIGN INTENTG4

SECTION - FLOWER SHAPE SCULPTURE
SCALE: 1 1/2"=1'-0"A

GATEWAY MONUMENT - FRONT VIEW
SCALE: 3/8"=1'-0"

SIDE VIEW
SCALE: 3/8"=1'-0"

PAINT AND ACRYLIC COLORS
NOTE:

THE SIGN CONTRACTOR MUST VISIT THE SITE AND FULLY INFORM

THEMSELVES AS TO ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS, FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION AND CONDITION FOR SIGN.

FABRICATOR TO PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS TO DETAIL ALL

CONSTRUCTION, ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING SPECIFICATIONS
FOR CLIENT REVIEW PRIOR TO START OF PROJECT.
1 2
GREEN L.E.D.S
WHITE L.E.D.S

STAINLESS STEEL FASTENERS

FACE WITH CUT OUT SHAPES

LIGHT BLUE TRANSLUCENTACRYLIC

TENANT NAME
TRANSLUCENT ACRYLIC:

LT. BLUE TRANSLUSCENT ACRYLIC: ACRYLITE STANICE, PACIFIC 5H09 VELVETY MATTE SURFACE APPLY WHITE LED DIFFUSER FILM ON SECOND SURFACE.

CLEAR ACRYLIC BACK ON FLOWER SHAPE

EXCEPT WHERE FLOWER SHAPE EXTENDS

BEYOND CABINET ON BACK SIDE THESE

AREAS TO BE SOLID ALUMINUM PANEL

PAINTED TO MATCH GRAY GREEN CABINET
COLOR.4"11/2"PAINTS AND FINISHES
A1

ID COLOR FINISH DESCRIPTION
BRONZE SATIN TO MATCH MATTHEWS MP 41313SP DARK METALLIC BRONZE LT. REY GREEN SATIN TO MATCH MATTHEWS MP 14530 SALVIA DIVINORUM BRIGHT OLIVE GREEN SATIN TO MATCH MATTHEWS MP 12636 PALTA GREEN P1
P2
P3
P1
P2 P2
A1
P3
A1
P2
P1
P3
P3
P1
08/19/2022
-184-

SHEET
DATE
W.O.

SCALE
6537
08/23/2022

AS NOTED
JWBDESIGNER Bellflower Gateway_DesInt.aiBELLFLOWER GATEWAYSIGN PROGRAM DESIGN INTENTG5 NOTE:

THE SIGN CONTRACTOR MUST VISIT THE SITE AND FULLY INFORM

THEMSELVES AS TO ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS, FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION AND CONDITION FOR SIGN.

FABRICATOR TO PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS TO DETAIL ALL

CONSTRUCTION, ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING SPECIFICATIONS
FOR CLIENT REVIEW PRIOR TO START OF PROJECT.

BRONZE SCULPTURE: MOUNT TO FOUR 12” DIA. x 18” DEPTH FOOTING.

SCULPTURE TO BE SUPPLIED BY AND COORDINATED WITH CITY REPRESENTATIVE.

MAINTAIN 24” CLEAR SPACE BETWEEN THE PLANTING BASE OF SCULPTURE ON ALL SIDES.

SEE LANDSCAPE PLANS FOR LOCATION.
2 08/19/2022
-185-

SHEET
DATE
W.O.

SCALE
6537
06/06/2022

AS NOTED
JWBDESIGNER Bellflower Gateway_DesInt.aiBELLFLOWER GATEWAYSIGN PROGRAM DESIGN INTENTG6 NOTE:

THE SIGN CONTRACTOR MUST VISIT THE SITE AND FULLY INFORM

THEMSELVES AS TO ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS, FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION AND CONDITION FOR SIGN.

FABRICATOR TO PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS TO DETAIL ALL

CONSTRUCTION, ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING SPECIFICATIONS
FOR CLIENT PRIOR TO START OF PROJECT.

GALAXY ® GT6x 8 MM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
201 Daktronics Drive PO Box 5128 Brookings, SD 57006-5128 tel 888-325-7446 605-692-0200 ext. 57220 fax 605-692-0381 www.daktronics.com email [email protected]
Copyright © 2020 Daktronics DD4305463 Rev01 042820 Page 1 of 8 The Galaxy ® GT6x offers high-value Galaxy features combined with high-resolution 8 mm surface mount LED technology to provide high- quality images.
8 MM TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Character Height:
2" (7 pixel font)
Line Spacing:

8.13 mm (0.3")
3-in-1 SMD
Maximum Brightness:
8,000 nits
Full Color Capability:
281 trillion colors
Viewing Angle:
160 degrees horizontal x 70 degrees vertical
Min Viewing Distance:
18' (8 mm)
Estimated LED Lifetime:
100,000+ hours
Contrast Enhancement:
black louvers and module
face grooves disperse light
Message Capability:

Text, graphics, logos, basic animation, video clips,
multiple font styles, and sizes
Control Software:

Venus ® Control Suite
Power:
120, 120/240 VAC Single Phase
Display Dimming:
64 levels (Automatic, scheduled or manual control)
Communication Options:

Ethernet Fiber Optic, Ethernet Bridge Radio,
Remote Cellular, Ethernet CAT5
Operating Temperature:
-40°F to 120°F with 99% RH non-condensing
Compliance Information:

UL Listed, FCC compliance
GT6 x SERIES SPECIFICATIONS

DISPLAY CONFIGURATIONS
Single-face (SF)
Available in all sizes
Two-view (2V)
Available in all sizes

MODEL NUMBER GUIDE
GT6x - 90 x 135 - 8 - RGB - SF
SeriesLines HighColumns WideLine SpacingLED ColorSingle Face or Two ViewPRODUCT FEATURES • All sealed components
• Quick connects
• Mounting clips
• High-contrast louvers
• Redundant module signal
• Large sections for fast installation
• Front ventilation on displays less than
eight feet tall
• No spreader beam required for displays
greater than eight feet tall
• Single-step module removal
• Shallow cabinet depth
• Narrow cabinet borders
08/19/2022
-186-

G7SHEET
DATE
W.O.

SCALE
6537
06/06/2022

AS NOTED
JWBDESIGNER Bellflower Gateway_DesInt.aiBELLFLOWER GATEWAYSIGN PROGRAM DESIGN INTENT7" [178]8-1/8" [207] 11-1/8"
[283]
4" [102]
7' 5-3/8" [2271]

OVERALL WIDTH
7' 2-3/8" [2194]

ACTIVE WIDTH
2' 4-13/16" [732]
ACTIVE HEIGHT2' 10-7/8" [886]
OVERALL HEIGHT 1-3/4" 44[ ]0" 0[ ]2' 6-5/16" 770[ ]7' 3-5/8" 2226[ ]30.300 769,62[ ].000 0[ ]59.100 1501,14[ ]59.100 1501,14[ ] #DETAIL DESCRIPTION
1 DISPLAY GT6x-AAAxBBB-CC (SEE CHART IN TOP LEFT)
2 LED COLOR RGB
3 ACTIVE AREA 2' 4-13/16" [732] X 7' 2-3/8" [2194]
4 OVERALL SIZE 2' 10-7/8" [886] X 7' 5-3/8" [2271]
5 CABINET ALUMINUM & STEEL
6 VENTILATION FRONT
7 ACCESS SERVICE FROM FRONT OF DISPLAY
8 WEIGHT 181 LBS 83 KG (APPROX)
9 SHIPPING SHIPPED AS A SINGLE UNIT
10 DIMENSIONS FEET AND INCHES [MILLIMETERS]
11 PAINTED SEMI-GLOSS BLACK

STRUCTURAL RATING
1 DESIGN WIND PRESSURE "P" (CASE A)P<=:100 PSF (ASD)
2 STANDARD/CODE IBC 2009/ASCE7-05, IBC 2012/ASCE7-10
3 ALL CLIP ANGLES MUST BE USED TO MOUNT DISPLAY
POWER RATING PER SINGLE FACE: FOR SIZING ELEC.SERVICE MAX REQ'D SHOWN

TECHNOLOGY COLOR
MAX
WATTS
120 VAC1 PH
50/60 HZ
AMPS
120/240 VAC1PH
50/60Hz (3 WIRES+GND)
240VAC 1PH 50Hz
(2 WIRES + GND)

INTERNATIONAL

SPECIAL ORDER
LINE 1
(AMPS)
LINE 2
(AMPS)
LINE 1
(AMPS)
GT6x RGB 1215 10.13 N/A N/A 5.07

VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS
1 DISPLAY RELIES ON VENTILATION TO FUNCTION PROPERLY. INTAKES, LOCATED AT THE FRONT OF THE DISPLAY, MUST BE ABLE TO DRAW IN AIR AT A TEMPERATURE NO GREATER THAN 120 F. 2 IN ORDER TO ENSURE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AIRFLOW IS MAINTAINED, NO PORTION OF THE VENTILATION OPENINGS ALONG THE FRONT OF THE DISPLAY MAY BE COVERED OR OBSTRUCTED IN ANY WAY.

INSTALL NOTES
1 IN ORDER TO PRESERVE THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY OF THE DISPLAY CABINET, THE 90 ANGLE BETWEEN THE CABINET AND THE LIFTEYE MUST BE MAINTAINED - USING A SPREADER BEAM IS SUGGESTED. ALL EYEBOLTSMUST BE USED WHEN LIFTING. 2 1/2" LIFTEYES TO ASSIST WITH DISPLAY INSTALLATION. LIFTEYES MAY NOT BE USED FOR PERMANENT INSTALLATION. LIFTEYES MAY BE REMOVED. 3 MECHANICAL AND SIGNAL CONNECTIONS OCCUR EXTERNAL TO DISPLAY. 4 CLIP ANGLE FOR MOUNTING. CLIP ANGLES CAN BE ADJUSTED VERTICALLY DURING INSTALLATION. CLIP ANGLE CAN BE WELDED OR BOLTED TO STRINGER. ALL CLIP ANGLE LOCATIONS MUST BE USED. 5 DAKTRONICS IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR THE MOUNTING HARDWARE ORTHE INTEGRITY OF THE MOUNTING STRUCTURE. 6 DAKTRONICS IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR THE MAIN ELECTRICAL DISCONNECT. SEE POWER RATINGS ABOVE. 7 SEE DWG-03864398 FOR SIGNAL & MTG DETAILS

PIXELS HIGH (AAA) PIXELS WIDE( BBB) PIXEL SPACING (CC)
120 360 6mm
90 270 8mm
72 216 10mm
REV: DATE:DESCRIPTION:BY:

THE CONCEPTS EXPRESSED AND DETAILS SHOWN ON THIS DRAWINGARE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY. DO NOT REPRODUCE BYANY MEANS WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OFDAKTRONICS, INC. OR ITS WHOLLY OWNED SUBSIDIARIES.COPYRIGHT 2019 DAKTRONICS, INC. (USA)

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
PROJECT:GT6x DISPLAYS
TITLE:SHOP DWG, GT6x, 2' 11''x7' 6'' (2x6 MODS)
DATE:24-SEP-19 DIM UNITS:INCHES [MILLIMETERS]SHEET REV
SCALE:1/15 DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 1 OF 1 00
DESIGN:TWHITEH JOB NO. FUNC - TYPE - SIZE 4296051DRAWN:LSIEH P2056 E - 07 - B

DAKTRONICS
SEE INSTALL NOTES #1, #2

EXHAUST AREA

DO NOT COVER

INTAKE AREA

DO NOT COVER
SEE VENT NOTE #2

LIGHT SENSOR
(DO NOT BLOCK)

FRONT VIEW
SEE INSTALL NOTE #7

RIGHT VIEW
SEE STRUCTURAL NOTE #3
AND INSTALL NOTE #4

TOP VIEW
08/19/2022
-187-

STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING
-188-

S1SHEET
DATE
W.O.

SCALE
6537
08/22/2022

AS NOTED
JWBDESIGNER Bellflower Gateway_DesInt2.aiBELLFLOWER GATEWAYSTRUCTURAL ENGINEERING-189-

S2SHEET
DATE
W.O.

SCALE
6537
08/22/2022

AS NOTED
JWBDESIGNER Bellflower Gateway_DesInt2.aiBELLFLOWER GATEWAYSTRUCTURAL ENGINEERING-190-

S3SHEET
DATE
W.O.

SCALE
6537
08/22/2022

AS NOTED
JWBDESIGNER Bellflower Gateway_DesInt2.aiBELLFLOWER GATEWAYSTRUCTURAL ENGINEERING-191-

S4SHEET
DATE
W.O.

SCALE
6537
08/22/2022

AS NOTED
JWBDESIGNER Bellflower Gateway_DesInt2.aiBELLFLOWER GATEWAYSTRUCTURAL ENGINEERING-192-

S5SHEET
DATE
W.O.

SCALE
6537
08/22/2022

AS NOTED
JWBDESIGNER Bellflower Gateway_DesInt2.aiBELLFLOWER GATEWAYSTRUCTURAL ENGINEERING-193-

S6SHEET
DATE
W.O.

SCALE
6537
08/22/2022

AS NOTED
JWBDESIGNER Bellflower Gateway_DesInt2.aiBELLFLOWER GATEWAYSTRUCTURAL ENGINEERING-194-

S7SHEET
DATE
W.O.

SCALE
6537
08/22/2022

AS NOTED
JWBDESIGNER Bellflower Gateway_DesInt2.aiBELLFLOWER GATEWAYSIGN PROGRAM DESIGN INTENT-195-

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
-196-

TRANSFORMERTSITE UTILITIES SYMBOL LISTSYMBOL DESCRIPTIONEHELECTRICAL HANDHOLE FLUSH IN GRADE.SINGLE LINE SYSTEM SYMB LISTSYMBOL DESCRIPTIONSHEET NOTE REFERENCE.1TRANSFORMER.INTEGRAL KILOWATTHOUR METERMBRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUIT, RUN EXPOSED.2# 12, 3/4"C.5# 12, 3/4"C.3# 12, 3/4"C.6# 12, 3/4"C.4# 12, 3/4"C.WIRING / EQUIP CONNECT SYMB LISTSYMBOLDESCRIPTIONGENERAL NOTES1. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL MATERIAL SHALL COMPLY WITH CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE (CEC)2019 EDITION AND ALL LOCAL AMENDMENTS, AND ALL OTHER GOVERNING CODES AND ORDINANCES.2. FIELD VERIFICATION: VERIFY ALL DEVICES AND CONDITIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK.3. IT SHALL BE THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO OBTAIN A COMPLETE SET OFDRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. HE/SHE SHALL CHECK THE DRAWINGS OF THE OTHER TRADES ANDSHALL CAREFULLY READ THE SPECIFICATIONS AND DETERMINE HIS RESPONSIBILITIES. FAILURE TO DOSO SHALL NOT RELEASE THE CONTRACTOR FROM DOING THE WORK IN COMPLETE ACCORDANCE WITHTHE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS.4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE HIS WORK WITH OTHER TRADES AT THE SITE. ANY COST TOROUTE CONDUIT OTHER THAN AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS SHALL BE INCURRED BY THE CONTRACTOR.5. WHEREVER A DISCREPANCY IN QUANTITY OR SIZE OF CONDUIT, WIRE, EQUIPMENT DEVICES, CIRCUITBREAKERS, TRANSFORMERS, GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEM, ECT. (ALL MATERIALS ARISES ONTHE DRAWINGS AND/OR SPECIFICATIONS), THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDINGAND INSTALLING ALL MATERIAL AND SERVICE REQUIRED BY THE STRICTEST CONDITIONS NOTED ONDRAWINGS AND/OR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS TO ENSURE COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEMS ASREQUIRED BY THE OWNER OR ENGINEER.6. ALL CONDUIT SIZES ARE BASED ON COPPER CONDUCTORS WITH THHN-2/THWN -2 INSULATION UNLESSOTHERWISE NOTED. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE COPPER. CONDUCTOR INSULATION SHALL BETHHN/TWHN UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. MINIMUM CONDUIT SIZE SHALL BE 3/4", UNLESS OTHERWISENOTED.7. INSTALL ALL EQUIPMENT, LIGHTING FIXTURE, DEVICES, CONDUIT AND CONDUIT SUPPORTS TO MEETSEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY D.8. CONDUIT RUNS SHOWN ARE DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY. INSTALL ALL CONDUITS TO SUIT FIELD CONDITIONS.9. PROVIDE PROPERLY SIZED LUGS AT ALL CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELS, FOR THE CONDUCTORS SHOWN TOCONNECT THESE LUGS.10. INSTALL ALL EXTERIOR MOUNTED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN WEATHERPROOF, NEMA-3R ENCLOSURES,UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.11. SEPARATE INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR, SIZED PER CEC 250-122, SHALL BEPROVIDED, INSTALLED IN THE SAME CONDUIT AS THE CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS FOR ALL FEEDERS ANDBRANCH CIRCUITS.12. CONNECTIONS TO ALL EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS SHALL BE COORDINATED. THE CONTRACTORSHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING MANUFACTURER'S SHOP DRAWINGS PRIOR TO ROUGHING INALL CONDUIT TO THIS EQUIPMENT.13. NOT ALL SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS ON THIS SHEET ARE USED.ALONDRA BLVDBELLFLOWER BLVDHARVARD STREETUNION BANKRETAIL / FOODKEY MAPORCHARD AVENUE PROJECT AREAABBREVIATIONSSUFFIX DESCRIPTIONC CONDUIT.CONDUIT ONLY, COMPLETE WITH PULLSTRING.C.O.GROUND.GNDPH. PHASE.V VOLTS.VOLTAGE DROP.VDW WIRE.COPPERCUA AMPERES L

ACIRTCELE P O
O